Proposal for a Council Directive amending Directive 82/714/EEC of 4 October 1982 laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels
Date: 1997-12-08
Institutions: European Commission
Subjects: harmonisation of standards, inland waterway shipping, maritime safety, technical standard, technological change

COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES 

Brussels, 08.12.1997 
COM(97) 644  final 

97/0335 (SYN) 

Proposal for a 

COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 

amending Directive 82/714/EEC of 4 October 1982 laying down technical 
requirements for inland waterway vessels 

(presented by the Commission) 

EXPLANATORY  MEMORANDUM 

A.  FOREWORD 

1.  Directive  82/714/EEC of  4  October  1982  laid  down  harmonised  technical  requirements  for 
inland  navigation  vessels.  The  central  purpose  of  the  proposal  presented  here  is  to  update 
Directive  82/714/EEC  in line with technical progress  in order  to improve safety  and  in order  to 
promote  inland  navigation  transport,  which  is  a  very  environmentally-friendly  mode  of 
transport. 

B.  GENERAL REMARKS 

2.  Inland  navigation  vessels  in  Europe  are  currently  subject  to  different  regimes  as  regards 
technical requirements.  These are laid down by the following  instruments: 

-  The  revised  Regulation  on  Inspection  of  Shipping  on  the  Rhine  of  1 January  1995, 
referred  to  hereafter  as  "the  Rhine  Rules",  as  adopted  by  the  Central  Commission  for 
Navigation  on  the  Rhine  (CCNR).  This  applies  to vessels  operating  on  the  waterways 
covered  by  the  Revised  Convention  for  Rhine  Navigation  (Mannheim  Convention)  of 
1868; 

-  Council  Directive  82/714/EEC  of  4  October  1982.  The  technical  requirements  in 
Annex  II  to  this  Directive  apply  on  Community  waterways  outside  the  Rhine,  but  the 
Directive  incorporates the Rhine Rules in so far  as the Rhine is concerned; 

-  the  UN  Economic  Commission  for  Europe  (ECE)  Recommendations  on  (uniform) 
technical  requirements  for  inland  waterway  vessels  (Annex  to  Resolution  No  17,  rev., 
14 October  1981). 

3.  Apart  from  the  differences  in  the  geographical  scope  of  these  provisions,  they  also  have 
different  legal force. The Regulation on Inspection of Shipping on the Rhine is applicable  within 
the area covered by the Mannheim Convention and binding  for  its signatories  (Belgium,  France, 
Germany,  the  Netherlands  and  Switzerland).  The  Council  Directive  is,  of  course,  binding  on 
EU  Member  States  and  must be  transposed  into  national  law.  However,  those  Member  States 
which have inland waterways which are not linked to the international  network can,  on the basis 
of Article 7.1(a), exempt vessels on these waterways  from  the application of the Directive.  The 
international  waterway  network  only extends  to six  Member  States - Austria,  Belgium,  France, 
Luxembourg,  Germany  and  the  Netherlands.  In  contrast,  the  UN  Economic  Commission  for 
Europe's  (ECE)  Recommendations  on  (uniform)  technical  requirements  for  inland  waterway 
vessels, as specified  in the Annex to Resolution No  17 of  the Principal  Working  Party  on Inland 
Water Transport,  are not binding 

2  h 

4.  There  are  also  differences  in the  technical  level  required  by  the  three  instruments  and  their 
scope  of  application.  The  1995  Rhine  Rules  represent  the  most  up  to  date  technical 
requirements,  and  cover  a  wider  range  of  vessels  than  Directive  82/714/EEC.  The  great 
majority  of new vessels brought into service in the Community  today are in fact constructed  and 
fitted  out  according  to  the Rhine  Rules.  The  technical  requirements  set out  in the Annexes  to 
Directive  82/714/EEC,  however,  are  based  on  the  Rhine  Rules  which  were  in  force  in  1982. 
As for  the ECE Recommendations  on technical requirements  (Annex to Resolution No  17, rev., 
14 October  1981), these are also based on the old Rhine Rules and are now out of date as well. 
In view of this fact,  discussions are currently being held within the ECE on adapting the Annex 
to Resolution No  17 to bring it in line with the  1995 Rhine Rules. 

5.  To  sum  up  the  current  situation,  then,  there  is  a  core  area  formed  by  the  Rhine  where  the 
most up-to-date safety  and technical requirements  are  in force,  there  is a secondary  area around 
this  formed  by  the  other  waterways  of  the  six  EU  Member  States  concerned  where  the 
requirements of Annex II of the  1982 Directive are in force,  and there is a third area outside the 
EU where the ECE Recommendations  may be adopted by non-EU European states.  The result 
of this is that,  whilst there is an international waterway network which includes six EU Member 
States  and  which,  since  the  construction  of  the  Rhine-Main-Danube  Canal  in  1992,  links  the 
Black Sea to the North Sea,  there  is no common standard for vessels operating  on this  network. 
Even within the EU itself,  two different  sets of technical requirements apply. 

6. There is therefore  an urgent need to update the technical requirements laid down by  Directive 
82/714/EEC,  and  not  simply  because  they  are  becoming  out  of  date.  It  is  logical  that  this 
process  should  take  the  form  of  a  revision  of  the  technical  requirements  in  line  with  the  latest 
Rhine  Rules,  not only  because  these represent  the  most up  to date safety  standards  which  have 
also proved their worth in practice but,  in addition, because this is also the approach being  taken 
by  the UNECE.  However,  a  simple  revision  of  the Annexes  alone  would  not be  sufficient  as 
can be seen from  the explanations given in part E. of this explanatory  memorandum. 

C. JUSTIFICATION  FOR  ACTION AT COMMUNITY  LEVEL  (SUBSIDIARITY) 

(a)  What  are  the  objectives  of  the  proposed  action  in  relation  to  the  Community's 

objectives? 

7.  The  objectives  are  to  guarantee  the  highest  level  of  safety  in  inland  navigation  and  to 
establish  a  single  market  in  waterway  transport  services  through  the  adoption  of  common 
technical standards. 

(b) 

Does  competence for  the planned  activity lie solely with the  Community or  is  it shared 
with the Member States? 

8.  This  proposal  is presented  on  the basis  of  Article  75  (1)  of  the  Treaty  and  competence  is 
shared with the Member States. 

(c) 

What  is  the  Community dimension of  the problem  (for example,  how  many  Member 
States are involved and what solution has been used up to now)l 

9.  Directive  82/714/EEC  is  addressed  to  all  Member  States  but,  as  noted  above,  Member 
States may exempt vessels on waterways  not connected  to the  European  international  waterway 
network from its provisions.  The proposed revision of the Directive will not affect  this. 

(d) What means of action are available to the Community? 

10.  Not applicable - this proposal concerns the revision of an existing Directive. 

(e) 

What real added value will the activity proposed  by the  Commission provide  and  what 

would be the cost of inaction ? 

11.  The action will improve safety  in inland waterway transport,  ensure a single set of  technical 
requirements  for  inland  waterway  vessels  within  the  EU,  and  also  contribute  to  harmonisation 
on  a  pan-European  level.  This  will  facilitate  transport  by  inland  waterway  and  thereby 
contribute  to  a  modal  shift  in  favour  of  waterways  and  a  reduction  in  the  overall  level  of 
environmental  damage brought  about by  transport  activities.  The cost of  inaction would be  an 
increasing  divide  between  the  regimes  in  force  on  the  Community's  waterways  and  a 
consequent fracturing  of the market. 

In  addition,  shipbuilders  will  be  able  to  construct  vessels  according  to  harmonised 

12. 
specifications  for  a larger,  single market. 

(f) What forms  of  action are available to  the  Community (recommendation, financial support, 
regulation, mutual recognition,  etc.  ...?) 

Not applicable - action concerns revision of existing  legislation. 

(g) Is  it  necessary  to  have  a  uniform Regulation  or  is  a  Directive  setting  out  the  general 
objectives sufficient, leaving implementation at the level of  the Member States'! 

Not applicable - action concerns revision of existing  legislation. 

D.  COHERENCE WITH OTHER COMMUNITY  POLICIES 

13.  The  Community  has adopted  a series  of  legislative  acts  to establish  a  single  market  in  the 
waterway sector.  In particular, 

Council  Directive  76/135/EEC  on  reciprocal  recognition  of  navigability  licenses  for 
inland waterway vessels: 

Directive  87/540/EEC  on  access  to  the  occupation  of  carrier  by  inland  waterway  in 
national  and  international  transport  and  on  the  mutual  recognition  of  diplomas, 
certificates  and other evidence of formal  qualifications  for this occupation: 

Council  Regulation  (EEC)  No  3921/91  laying  down  the  conditions  under  which  non 
resident  carriers  may  transport  goods  or  passengers  by  inland  waterway  within  a 
Member State: 

Council  Directive  96/50/EC)  on  the  harmonisation  of  the  conditions  for  obtaining 
national  boatmasters'  certificates  for  the  carriage  of  goods  and  passengers  by  inland 
waterway  in the Community. 

Council  Regulation  (EC)  N°  1356/96  on  common  rules  applicable  to  the  transport  of 
goods  or  passengers  by  inland  waterway  between  Member  States  with  a  view  to 
establishing  freedom  to provide such transport services. 

Council  Directive  96/75./EC  on  the  systems  of  chartering  and  pricing  in  national  and 
international  inland waterway transport  in the Community. 

This  legislation  has  largely  established  a  single  market  in  inland  waterway  transport  on  the 
Community's waterway  network. 

14.  Finally,  the  Commission's  proposal  is  in  conformity  with  the  Community's  policy  in 
external relations.  Under the terms of  the Europe  Agreements,  associated  countries  are  obliged 
to approximate  their  laws  to  those  of  the  Community.  Those  associated  countries  which  are 
linked  to  the  Community's  waterways  (Bulgaria,  Czech  Republic,  Hungary,  Poland,  Rumania 
and  Slovakia)  are  therefore  obliged  to  comply  with  the  requirements  of  Directive  82/714. 
However,  many  of  these countries  base their  legislation  on  the  ECE  Recommendations,  which 
are in the process of  being revised  in line with  the  1995 Rhine Rules.  Unless  the  EC  Directive 
is also updated,  there is a danger  that associated countries  might be obliged  to approximate  their 
laws to legislation  which  in some areas  is outdated  in comparison  with their own.  Updating  the 
Directive  in line  with  the  Rhine  Rules  will  therefore  facilitate  the approximation  of  laws  in die 
associated  countries  as  well  as  contribute  to  the  harmonisation  of  technical  requirements  on  a 
pan-European scale. 

G 

E.  CONTENTS  OF THE  PROPOSAL 

Article  1 

15.  The  third  indent  of  Article  1  is  re-worded.  The  existing  wording  classes  all  other 
Community waterways not listed in Annex  1  as Zone 4 waterways.  This is misleading,  because 
there  are  certain  waterways  where  Member  states  have  chosen  to  exempt  vessels  from  the 
application of the Directive and which are therefore not listed in Annex  1, but which may not in 
fact correspond  to the navigation criteria for  Zone 4.  The new wording  therefore  refers  only  to 
Zone 4 waterways specifically  included in Annex 1. 

16.  Article  2  is replaced  in order  to bring the scope of application of the Directive closer  into 
line  with  that  of  the  Rhine  Rules,  in  the  interests  of  harmonisation  and  safety.  Thus,  vessels 
over 20 meters  in length or with a displacement of  100 cubic meters or more  now come  within 
the scope  of  the Directive.  Passenger vessels built  to carry  more  than  12 passengers  now  also 
fall under the scope of the Directive, as do floating equipment and floating establishments.  Sea 
going vessels,  however,  remain  exempt from the  scope of  the Directive  as long  as  they  are  in 
possession  of  the relevant maritime certificates  concerning  sea-worthiness  and protection  of  the 
sea. 

17.  The  text  of  Article  3.  first  indent  is  replaced.  According  to  the  existing  text  of  the 
Directive, vessels  in possession  of a Community  inland  navigation  certificate  are not  permitted 
to navigate  on  Zone  R waterways,  in other  words,  on those  Community  waterways  where  the 
Rhine  Rules  apply.  This  is  reasonable,  since  Community  certificates  are  currentiy  issued 
according  to  standards  which  are  not  equivalent  to  those  on  the  Rhine.  However,  once  the 
Annexes  to  the  Directive  have  been  updated  in  line  with  the  1995  Rhine  Rules,  new  vessels 
issued with a Community certificate  stating Ml  compliance with the technical  requirements  laid 
down  in  the  Annexes  will  meet  exacdy  the  standards  in  force  on  the  Rhine.  The  revised  text 
therefore  allows for vessels holding  a Community  certificate  to navigate on the Rhine.  Vessels 
holding  Rhine  certificates  will  continue  to  be  allowed  to  navigate  on  other  Community 
waterways. 

18.  Article 5 is replaced.  The first indent of paragraph  1. remains unaltered,  but the second  is 
reworded  so as to make reference  to a new Annex Va.  This  new  Annex  lists  those areas  of  a 
vessel where Member  States may  impose additional  requirements  for vessels  operating  in  Zone 
1  and  2  waterways  (estuaries  and  waterways  of  a  maritime  character).  The  purpose  of  this 
Annex  is  to  facilitate  mutual  recognition  either  of  the  Community  supplementary  certificate 
(which  is  issued  to  vessels  having  a  Rhine  certificate)  or  of  additional  specifications  in  the 
Community  certificate  itself.  Thus,  for  example,  a  Community  certificate  specifying  that  a 
vessel  meets  certain additional requirements  for  a  Zone 2 waterway  in one Member  State  shall 
be recognised as proof of compliance with the corresponding additional requirements on a  Zone 
2 waterway  in another Member State. 

19.  A  new paragraph  3 is added  to Article 5.  Its purpose  is self-explanatory.  The  reductions 
in technical requirements are, for  safety  reasons, restricted to the subjects listed in Annex Vb. 

20.  Tide  II  of  the  Directive  is  concerned  with  the  first  issue  of  a  Community  certificate. 
Article 8 paragraph 2 of the existing  Directive refers  to vessels  in service and lays down a time 
limit  for  the  first  inspection  of  such  vessels  by  1.7.98,  which  is  when  the  provisions  of  this 
proposal  will  enter  into  force.  Vessels  in  service  on  Community  waterways  on  1.7.98  will, 
therefore,  already  have  been  subjected  to  their  first  technical  inspection.  However,  Article  8 
paragraph  2.  second  indent  of  the  Directive  allows  for  a  derogation  for  vessels 
laid  down 
before  1970 and operating exclusively on national networks, whereby Member States may allow 
an  extra  seven  years  (until  1.7.2005)  before  such  vessels  must  be  submitted  for  a  technical 
inspection.  Certain  Member  States  have  indeed  made  use  of  this  derogation.  Under  these 
circumstances,  it would be unfair  for  such vessels, constructed before  1970, to be submitted  for 
their first Community  technical  inspection after  1.7.98,  according  to standards  drawn up  in the 
1990's.  The proposed  addition to Article  8 paragraph  2 therefore  allows for  such vessels  to be 
granted  Community  certificates,  but where they  fail  to meet the updated  technical  requirements 
given  in Annex  II,  this  must  be  specified  in the certificate.  When  components  or parts  of  the 
vessel are replaced or altered,  then the relevant requirements of the new Annex II for  these parts 
of  the vessel  must  be  complied  with.  However,  when parts  are  replaced  during  the course  of 
normal repairs and maintenance,  it is not necessary  that  1995 specification  replacement parts  be 
used.  For example,  if a bearing  in the steering gear of a vessel in service needs to be  replaced, 
then it should not be required that the whole steering gear should be replaced with a new system 
constructed according to the requirements of the new Annex II.  The replacement of the bearing 
with another one of the same type is acceptable. 

21.  A new Article  8. paragraph  4 is proposed to deal with a similar case to the above.  Certain 
vessels,  such  as vessels  intended  for  passenger  transport  which carry  more  than  12 people,  are 
brought  within  the  scope  of  the  Directive  for  the  first  time.  These  vessels  may  have  been 
constructed  according  to  national  legislation  rather  than  the  specific  requirements  laid  down  in 
Annex II.  It is therefore  unreasonable to require such vessels to be submitted  to a first technical 
inspection according to Community  standards which they were not designed to meet.  The same 
rule as for the vessels referred  to in paragraph 20 above therefore applies. 

22.  Article  11 is amended  to  include a reference  to passenger  vessels.  The five year  renewal 
requirement for  these vessels  is based on the Rhine Rules.  A new paragraph 2 is added to allow 
Member  States  to  issue  temporary  certificates  under  certain  conditions,  for  example  when  an 
existing certificate  is lost or  damaged. 

23.  Tide  III of the Directive  is concerned  with the rules  for  renewing  Community  certificates. 
Clearly,  vessels  in  service  which  have  been  issued  with  a  Community  navigation  certificate 
according  to  the  existing  Directive  and  its  Annexes  cannot  be  expected  to  meet  exacdy  the 
technical  requirements  for  new  vessels.  A  sentence  is  therefore  added  to  Article  13  which 
requires  these  vessels  to  be  subject  instead  to  the  special  transitional  provisions  in  Annex  II, 
Chapter 24.  These are based  on the transitional provisions contained  in the Rhine Rules,  which 
apply  to  those  vessels  issued  with  a  Rhine  certificate  before  the  new  Rhine  technical 
requirements were adopted on  1.1.95.  In most cases, these provisions follow  the same principle 

as  for  vessels  in  service  which  are  subjected  to  their  first  technical  inspection  after  1.7.98, 
(described  above  in  paragraphs  21  and  22)  whereby  those  components  or  parts  of  the  vessel 
which do not meet the new technical requirements may remain in service until such time as they 
are replaced or altered,  in which case they must meet the new standards.  However,  certain key 
items must be replaced on the occasion of the technical inspection itself. 

24.  Article  15 is amended slighdy.  No further  comment. 

25.  A new Article  19 is proposed  in order to inaugurate a technical adaptation  Committee.  For 
reasons  of  economy,  the existing  Committee established  by Article 7 of  Directive  91/672/EEC 
on the reciprocal  recognition  of  national  boatmasters'  certificates  for  the  carriage  of  goods  and 
passengers  by  inland  waterway1  will be used.  As  with  similar  Committees  in other  fields,  the 
task  of  the  Committee  in  this  case  will  be  to  advise  on  amendments  to  the  Annexes  to  this 
Directive  in  line  with  technical  progress  and  with  corresponding  developments  in  this  area 
undertaken by other  international  organisations.  This  is an essential  measure  if the Directive  is 
to remain up to date and meaningful.  (According  to the existing  Directive,  each amendment  to 
the  Annexes  must  be  approved by  the  Council:  this  is  neither  practicable  nor  efficient.)  The 
Central  Commission for  the Rhine is specifically  mentioned since this is the leading body  in the 
development  of  technical  requirements  for  inland  navigation  vessels  and  also  because  the 
Committee  should  ensure  that  the  Community  certificate  and  the  Rhine  certificate  continue  to 
indicate an equivalent level of  safety. 

26.  Article  20  is  replaced.  The  original  purpose  of  Article  20  was  to  ensure  that  Directive 
76/135  on the mutual  recognition  of  certificates  would  continue  to apply  to vessels  outside  the 
scope of  Directive  82/714 as well as to those vessels coming within its scope but not yet  issued 
with  a  Community  certificate.  As  a  result  of  the  change  in  the  scope  of  Directive  82/714 
brought  about  by  this  proposal,  fewer  vessels  will  be  subject  to  the  provisions  of  Directive 
76/135.  Nevertheless,  there  will  remain  a small  number  of vessels  which  are  not  covered  by 
the  revised  Directive  82/714,  (vessels  used  for  goods  transport  having  a  total  dead  weight 
between  20  and  100  tonnes,)  and  therefore  which  will  not  be  issued  with  a  Community 
certificate,  but  which  will  continue  to  navigate  on  Community  waterways.  Directive  76/135 
must remain in force to cover the case of these vessels. 

O.J.  L 373,  31.12.91 

Article 2 

27.  The  national  legislation  transposing  the revised  Directive  is to enter  into  force  on  the  date 
by  which  inspections  according  to  the  provisions  of  the  existing  Directive  must  have  been 
completed - that is,  1.7.98. 

Article 3 

28.  No Comment. 

Anne* 

29.  The Annex contains new versions of Annexes  I,  II and  III to the existing Directive as well 
as new annexes Va, Vb and VI which are to be added to it. 

30.  The  new version of Annex  I lists the waterways  in the different  zones  in the  Community, 
taking  into'account  the  enlargement  of  the  Community  and  new  waterways  constructed  since 
1982.  Zones  1 and 2 are estuaries and waterways  of a maritime  nature.  Zone 3 includes those 
waterways  which  are  equivalent  to  the  Rhine  and  Zone  4  includes  regulated  waterways  and 
canals.  Navigation conditions are most severe in Zone  1  and least severe in Zone 4. 

31.  The  new version  of Annex  II contains the technical  requirements based  on the  1995  Rhine 
Rules.  Certain  articles  of  the  1995 Rhine Rules  have  not been  included  because  they  are  not 
relevant  for  the  purposes  of  issuing  Community  certificates  or  because  their  provisions  are 
contained  in  the  text  of  the  Directive  itself.  However,  for  ease  of  comparison  between 
Community  rules  and  certificates  and  Rhine rules  and  certificates,  the numbering  of  the  Rhine 
Rules has been retained.  Chapters  1 and 2 of Annex  II are concerned  with definitions  and  the 
procedural aspects of technical vessel inspections and the issue of certificates.  Chapters 3  to 23 
lay down the technical requirements  for  inland waterway vessels  (identical  to those currentiy  in 
force on the Rhine).  Chapter 24 lays down transitional requirements for vessels in possession of 
In 
a  Community  certificate  on  1.7.98,  when  the  revised  requirements  will  enter  into  force. 
most  cases,  these  transitional  provisions  only  require  vessel  parts  and  components  to  be 
upgraded  to  meet  the  new  requirements  when  these  parts  are  replaced  or  re-built.  For  safety 
reasons however,  a small number of components  must be upgraded when the existing  certificate 
expires. 

32.  The  new  version  of  Annex  III  gives  a  completely  new  model  for  the  Community 
Certificate,  which  is  based  on  the  current  Rhine  certificate.  This  is  only  logical,  since  the 
certificate  relates  to the fulfilment  of  technical  requirements  which are themselves based  on the 
Rhine Rules.  It should  be  noted  that Annex  IV  of  the existing  Directive,  giving  the  model  of 
the Supplementary  Community  Certificate,  remains unchanged. 

10 

33.  Annex  Va  specifies  those  aspects  of  the  vessel  where  additional  requirements  are 
permissible on Zones  1 and 2 . 

34.  The  new  Annex  Vb  specifies  those  aspects  of  the  vessel  where  reductions  in  technical 
requirements are permissible on Zone 4. 

35.  The new Annex VI provides the model for the new Temporary Community  Certificate 

36.  The  effects  of  the proposal  regarding  the various vessel  categories  may  be  summarised  in 
the table overleaf: 

11 

TABLE 1 

Technical Requirements  for Inland Waterway  Vessels  following  the Proposed  Revision 
of Directive  82/714 

Vessel Category 

Time Period 

Nature  of  Inspection 

New Vessels 

^ 

From  1.7.98 

Vessels in service having a 
Community certificate 

from  1.7.98 

1.7.98 to  1.1.2005 

from 

Vessels in service but laid 
down before  1.1.70, 
operating only on national 
networks, not issued with a 
Community certificate  (as 
referred  to in Article 8, para. 
2,  second indent) 

Full compliance with the 
technical requirements of the 
new Annex II, equivalent to 
the Rhine Rules 

Compliance with the 
transitional provisions of 
Chapter 24, new Annex II 

To be issued with  certificates 
specifying  areas where vessel 
does not meet requirements 
of (new) Annex II.  These 
areas to conform  to Annex II 
if replaced or altered. 

Vessels in service brought 
within the scope of the 
Directive for  the first time, 

. 

from 
. 

. 

passenger vessels for  more 
than  12 people; 
floating equipment; 
floating establishments and 
installations. 

from 

1.7.98 - 31.7.2003 for 

as above 

passenger vessels and: 
- 

.  n  no  «.  n  o n AO  c 
1.7.98 - 31.7.2008 for 

other vessels, 

12 

COUNCIL  DIRECTIVE. 

amending  Directive  82/714/EEC  of  4  October  1 9 82 
laying  down  technical  requirements  for  inland  waterway  vessels 

The  Council  of  the  European  Union, 

Having  regard  to  the  Treaty  establishing  the  European  Community,  and  in  particular 
Article  75.1  thereof, 

Having  regard  to  the  proposal  from  the  Commission, 

Having  regard  to  the  opinion  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Committee, 

Acting  in  accordance  with  the  procedure  laid  d o wn  in  Article  189c  of  the  Treaty,  in  co 
operation  w i th  the  European  Parliament; 

technical 
Whereas  Council  Directive  82/714/EEC  of  4  October  1982 
requirements  for  inland  waterway  vessels  introduced  harmonised  conditions  for  issuing 
technical  certificates  for  inland  waterway  vessels  in  all  Member  States;  whereas  in  the 
interest  of  safety  these  conditions  have  to  be  adapted  to  technical  progress  also  taking 
into  account  changes  in  the  Community's  waterway  network;* • 

laying  d o wn 

the  conditions  and 

Whereas 
inland  navigation 
certificates  under  Article  22  of  the  Revised  Convention  for  Navigation  on  the  Rhine  have 
been  revised  as  from  1  January  1 9 9 5;  whereas  it  is  desirable  for  competition  and  safety 
reasons  to  adopt  the  scope  and  content  of  such  technical  requirements  for  the  whole  of 
the  Community  network; 

requirements 

technical 

issuing 

for 

Whereas  it  is  appropriate  that  Community  inland  navigation  certificates  attesting  the  full 
compliance  of  vessels  with  the  aforementioned  revised  technical  requirements  shall  be 
valid  on  all  Community  waterways; 

it 

is  desirable 

to  ensure  a  greater  degree  of  harmonisation  between 
issuing  supplementary  Community  certificates  by  Member  States 

the 
Whereas 
conditions 
for 
operations  on  Zone  1  and  2  waterways  (estuaries),  as  well  as  for  operations  on  Zone  4 
waterways; 

for 

Whereas  it  is  appropriate  to  provide  for  a  transitional  regime  for  vessels  in  service  not 
first 
yet  carrying  a  Community 
technical 
this 
inspection  under 
Directive; 

inland  navigation  certificate  when  subjected 
the 

to  a 
requirements  established  by 

technical 

revised 

Whereas  it  is  appropriate,  within  certain  limits  and  according  to  the  category  of  vessel 
concerned,  to  determine  the  period  of  validity  of  Community  certificates  in  each  specific 
case; 

-13 

Whereas  it  is necessary,  in order  to  allow  for  a  more  rapid  adaptation  of  the  annexes  to 
the  Directive  to  technical  progress,  to  introduce  procedures  foreseen  for  this  purpose 
based on Council  Decision  87/373/EEC1; 

Whereas  it  is  necessary  that  the  measures  provided  for  in  Directive  76/1 35/EEC  of  20 
January  1976  on  reciprocal  recognition  of  navigability  licenses  for  inland  waterway 
vessels  remain  in  force  for  those  vessels  covered  by  it  which  are  not  covered  by  this 
Directive; 

HAS  ADOPTED  THIS  DIRECTIVE : 

Directive  82/714/EEC  is hereby  amended  as follows : 

Article  1 

1.  The third  indent  of  Article  1  is amended to  read  as follows : 

-  Zone  4: the  other  Community  waterways  listed  in Chapter  III of  Annex  I. 

2.  Article  2  is replaced  by the  following : 

1.  "This Directive  shall apply to : 

-vessels  having  a length of  20  metres or more ; 
-vessels  for  which  the  product  of  L x  B x  T  as  defined  in  Annex  II 
Article  1.01  is  100  m3 or more ; 
-tugs  and  pusher  craft,  including  those  with  a  length  of  less  than 
20  metres  or  those  for  which  the  product  of  L x  B x  T  as  defined 
in  Annex  II  Article  1.01  is  less  than  100  m3,  provided  that  they 
have  been  built  to  tow  or  to  push  or  to  move  alongside  vessels  as 
referred to  in the first  indent. 

2.  The  following  are excluded  from this  Directive : 

-vessels  intended  for  passenger  transport  which  carry  no  more 
than  1 2 people  in addition to the  crew, 
-ferries, 
-pleasure  craft  with  a length of  less than  24  metres, 
-service  craft  belonging  to  supervisory  authorities  and  fire-service 
vessels, 
-naval vessels, 
-sea  going  vessels,  including  sea  going  tugs  and  pusher  craft 
operating  or  based  on  tidal  waters  or  temporarily  on  inland 
waterways,  provided  that  they  carry  the  following  valid  navigation 
or safety  certificates: 

a  certificate  proving  conformity  with  the  1974  International 
Convention  for  the  Safety  of  Life  at  Sea  (SOLAS),  as 
amended,  or  equivalent  a  certificate  proving  conformity 

O.J.  L197  of  18  July  1987 

^ 

with  the  1966  International  Convention  on  Load  Lines,  as 
amended, or equivalent and 
an 
IOPP  certificate  proving  conformity  with  the  1973 
International  Convention for the  Prevention  of  Pollution from 
Ships (MARPOL),  as amended, 
or, 
for  passenger  vessels  not  covered  by  all  of 
these 
Conventions,  a certificate  issued  in  conformity  with  Council 
/EEC  on  safety  rules  and  standards  for 
Directive  97/ 
passenger ships. 

3.  The first  and second  indents of  Article  3  are  replaced  by the  following 

"-a  certificate  issued  pursuant  to  Article  22  of  the  Revised  Convention  for  the 
Navigation  of  the  Rhine  or  a Community  inland-navigation  certificate  issued  after 
1  July  1998  pursuant to  Article  8  attesting the  full compliance  of the  vessel  with 
the technical  requirements  of  Annex  II, when operating  on a Zone  R waterway 

-  a  Community  inland  navigation  certificate  issued to  vessels  in  accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  this  Directive  and the  technical  requirements  of  Annex  II  when 
operating  on waterways  of other zones." 

4.  Article  5  is replaced  by the  following : 

" 1.  Each  Member  State  may,  subject  to  the  requirements  of  the  Revised 
Convention for the  Navigation  of the  Rhine  and subject to  approval  by the 
Commission  acting  in accordance  with  the  procedure  laid  down  in  Article 
19.3,  adopt  technical  requirements  additional  to  those  in  Annex  II  for 
vessels operating  on Zone  1 and 2  waterways  within  its territory. 

Such  additional  requirements  shall  be  restricted  to  the  subjects  listed  in 
Annex  Va  and  shall  be  drawn  up  in  conformity  with  the  provisions 
thereof. 

2.  Compliance  with  these  additional  requirements  shall  be  specified  in the 
Community  certificate  referred  to  in  Article  3  or,  where  Article  4  (2) 
applies,  in  the  supplementary  Community  certificate.  Such  proof  of 
compliance  shall  be  recognised  on  Community  waterways  of 
the 
corresponding  Zone. 

3.  Each Member  State  may, subject to  approval  by the  Commission  acting 
in  accordance  with  the  procedure  laid  down  in  Article  19.3,  allow  a 
reduction  of  the  technical  requirements  of  Annex  II  for  vessels  operating 
exclusively  on  Zone  4  waterways  within  its  territory.  Such  a  reduction 
shall  be  restricted  to  the  subjects  listed  in  Annex  Vb.  Where  the 
technical  characteristics  of  a  vessel  correspond  to  these  reduced 
technical  requirements  it  shall  be  specified  in  the  Community  certificate 
in  the  supplementary  Community 
or,  where  Article  4 
certificate,  that 
is  restricted  to  the  Zone  4  waterways 
concerned." 

(2)  applies, 

its  validity 

15 

5.  The  following  is  added to  Article  8  paragraph  2  : 

"In  cases  where  the  first  such  technical  inspection  is  carried  out  after  1  July 
1998,  any  failure  to  meet  the  requirements  laid  down  in  Annex  II  shall  be 
specified  in  the  Community  certificate.  Provided  that  the  competent  authorities 
consider  that  these  shortcomings  do  not  constitute  a  manifest  danger,  the 
vessels  concerned  may  continue  to  operate  until  such time  as those  components 
or  areas  of  the  vessel  which  have  been  certified  as  not  meeting  the  requirements 
are  replaced  or  altered,  whereafter  these  components  or  areas  shall  meet  the 
requirements  of  Annex  II. 

The  replacement  of  existing  parts  with  identical  parts  or  parts  of  an  equivalent 
technology  and  design  during  routine  repairs  and  maintenance  shall  not  be 
considered  as a replacement  within  the  meaning  of  this  paragraph." 

6.  The  following  paragraph  is  added to  Article  8 : 

"4.  The  Community  certificate  shall  be  issued  to  vessels  initially  excluded  from 
the  scope  of  this  Directive  which  become  subject  to  it  as  a  result  of  the 
modifications  of  Article  2  paragraphs  1  and  2  introduced  by  Directive  97/ 
, 
following  a  technical  inspection  which  shall  be  carried  out  upon  expiry  of  the 
vessel's  current  certificate,  but  in  any  case  no  later  than  31  June  2008,  to 
check  that  the  vessel  complies  with  the  technical  requirements  laid  down  in 
Annex  II.  Any  failure  to  meet  these  requirements  shall  be  specified  in  the 
Community  certificate.  Provided  that  the  competent  authorities  consider  that 
these  shortcomings  do  not  constitute  a  manifest  danger,  these  vessels  may 
continue  to  operate  until  such  time  as  those  components  or  areas  of  the  vessel 
which  have  been  certified  as  not  meeting  the  requirements  are  replaced  or 
altered,  whereafter  these  components  or  areas  shall  meet  the  requirements  of 
Annex  II. 

The  replacement  of  existing  parts  with  identical  parts  or  parts  of  an  equivalent 
technology  and  design  during  routine  repairs  and  maintenance  shall  not  be 
considered  as a replacement  within  the  meaning  of  this  paragraph." 

7.  Article  11  is  replaced  by the  following  : 

" 1.  The  period  of  validity  of  the  Community  certificate  shall  be  determined  in 
each  specific  case  by  the  authority  competent  for  issuing  such  certificates. 
However,  this  period  shall  not  exceed  5  years  for  passenger  vessels  or  10  years 
for  other  vessels. 

2.  Each  Member  State  may,  in  the  cases  specified  in  Articles  1 2  and  1 6  of  this 
Directive  and 
certificates,  the  period  of  validity  of  which  shall  not  exceed  6  months". 

in  chapter  2.05  of  Annex 

temporary  Community 

issue 

II, 

16 

8.  The  following  sentence  is  added  to  Article  13: 

"However,  for  the  renewal  of  Community  certificates  issued  before  1  July  1998 
the  transitional  provisions  of  chapter  24  of  Annex  II shall  apply." 

9.  The  first  sentence  of  the  second  alinéa of  Article  15  shall  read  as  follows 

"Following  this  inspection,  a  new  certificate  stating  the  technical  characteristics 
of  the  vessel  shall  be issued  or the  existing  certificate  amended  accordingly." 

10.  Article  19  is  replaced  by  the  following 

" 1.  Any  amendments  which  are  necessary  to  adapt  the  annexes  of  the  Directive 
to  technical  progress,  to  developments  in  this  area  arising  out  of  the  work  of 
other  international  organisations,  in  particular  that  of  the  Central  Commission  for 
Navigation  on the  Rhine, to  ensure  that  the  two  certificates  referred  to  in  Article 
3,  first  indent  are  issued  on the  basis  of  technical  requirements  which  guarantee 
an  equivalent  level  of  safety,  or  to  take  account  of  the  cases  referred  to  in 
Article  5,  shall  be  adopted  by  the  Commission  in  accordance  with  the  procedure 
laid  down  in the  present  Article,  paragraphs  2  and  3: 

2.  The  Commission  shall  be  assisted  by  the  Committee  established  under  Article 
7  of  Council  Directive  91/672/EEC,1  hereinafter  referred  to  as  "the  Committee". 

3.  The  representative  of  the  Commission  shall  submit  to  the  Committee  a  draft 
of  the  measures  to  be  taken.  The  Committee  shall  deliver  its  opinion  on  the 
draft  within  a  time  limit  which  the  chairman  may  lay  down  according  to  the 
urgency  of  the  matter,  if  necessary  by  taking  a  vote.  The  opinion  shall  be 
recorded  in  the  minutes  ;  in  addition,  each  Member  State  shall  have  the  right  to 
ask  to  have  its  position  recorded  in the  minutes.  The  Commission  shall  take  the 
utmost  account  of  the  opinion  delivered  by  the  Committee. 
It  shall  inform  the 
Committee  of  the  manner  in  which  its  opinion  has been taken  into  account." 

11 •  Article  20  is replaced  by the  following  : 

"For  those  vessels  outside  the  scope  of  Article  2,  paragraph  1,  but  falling  within 
the  scope  of  Article  1a.  of  Directive  76/1 35/EEC,  the  provisions  of  the  latter 
shall  apply." 

1 2.  Annexes  I,  II and  III shall  be replaced  by the  new  versions  set  out  in the  Annex 

attached  to  this  Directive.  Annexes  Va,  Vb  and VI  as set  out  in the  Annex  hereto 
are  added  to  the  Directive. 

O.J.  L  373  of  31.December  1991 

17 

Article  2 

1.  Member  States  shall  bring  into  force  the  laws,  regulations  and  administrative 
provisions  necessary  to  comply  with  this  Directive  at  the  same  time  not  later  than  1 
July  1998  and  forthwith  inform  the  Commission  thereof.  They  shall  apply  such  laws, 
regulations  and  administrative  provisions  from  1 July  1998. 

2.  When  Member  States  adopt  these  measures,  they  shall  contain  a  reference  to  this 
Directive  or  shall  be  accompanied  by  such  reference  on  the  occasion  of  their  official 
publication  The  methods  of  making  such  a  reference  shall  be  laid  down  by  Member 
States. 

3.  Member  States  shall  lay  down  the  system  of  penalties  for  breaching  the  national 
provisions  adopted  pursuant  to  this  Directive  and  shall  take  all  the  measures  necessary 
to  ensure  that  these  penalties  are  applied.  The  penalties  thus  provided  for  shall  be 
effective,  proportionate  and  dissuasive. 

4.  The  Member  States  shall  immediately  notify  to  the  Commission  all  provisions  of 
domestic  law  which  they  adopt  in the  field  governed  by  this  Directive.  The  Commission 
shall  inform  the  Member  States  thereof. 

Article  3 

This  Directive  is  addressed  to  the  Member  States. 

Done  at  Brussels, 

For the  Council 

The  President 

18 

ANNEX 1 

List of Community Inland Waterways  divided  geographically  into Zones  1, 2, 3 
and 4 

CHAPTER I 

Zone 1 

Federal Republic  of Germany 

Ems  : from  a line linking the Delfzijl  church tower  and the Knock  lighthouse towards 
the  open  sea  as  far  as  latitude  53°  30'  N  and  longitude  6°  45'  E  (i.e.  somewhat 
outside the trans-shipment zone for  dry-cargo  carriers in the Alte Ems, taking  account 
of the Ems-Dollars  cooperation treaty). 

Federal Republic  of Germany 

Zone 2 

Ems  : from  a line going from  the entrance of the port towards Papenburg  crossing the 
Ems, which  links the Diemen pumping station  (Diemer  Schôpfwerk)  and  the  opening 
of the dyke at Halte as far  as a line linking the Delfzijl  and Knock  lighthouses,  taking 
account of the Ems-Dollars  cooperation  treaty. 

Jade  : inside a line linking the Schillighôrn upper light and Langwarden  church tower. 

Weser  : from  the Bremen railway bridge to a line linking the Langwarden  and Kappel 
church  towers  with  the  Schwerburg  secondary  arm  including  the  Kleine  Weser, 
Rekumder-Loch, and Reenter Nebenarm secondary  arms. 

Elbe  : from  the lower  limit of the port of Hamburg  to  a line  linking the  Dose  beacon 
and the north-west point of the Hohe Ufer  (Dieksand) with the Este, Lune,  Schwinge, 
Oste,  Pinnau,  Kriickau  and  Stôr  tributaries  (in  each  case  from  the  barrage  to  the 
mouth) including the Nebenelbe. 

Meldorfer  Bucht  :  inside  a  line  linking  the  north-west  point  of  the  Hohe  Ufer 
(Dieksand)  and the Biisum west pier head. 

Flensburger fôrde  : inside a line linking the Kekenis lighthouse and Birknack. 

Eckemforder  Bucht  : inside  a  line  linking  Bocknis-Eck  to  the  north-west  tip  of  the 
mainland  at Danisch Nienhof. 

19 

Kieler  Fôrde  :  inside  a  line  linking  the  Bulk  lighthouse  and  the  Laboc  naval 
memorial. 

Leda  : from  the entrance to the outer harbour of Leer sea lock to the mouth. 

:  from 

Hunte 
Amalienbriicke in Oldenburg to the mouth. 

the  port  of  Oldenburg  and  from  140  m  downstream  of  the 

Lesum  : from  the Bremen-Burg railway bridge to the mouth. 

Este  : from  the Buxtchude barrage gate to the Este barrage. 

Luhe  : from  the mill  250 m upstream  of the Marschdamm-Horneburg  road  bridge  to 
the Lùhe barrage. 

Schwinge  : from  the footbridge  downstream of the Guldenstern bastion  at Stade to the 
Schwinge barrage. 

Freiburger-Hafenpriel  : from  the Freiburg/Elbe sluices to the mouth. 

Oste  : from  the Bremervorde mill dam to the Oste barrage. 

Pinnau  : from  the Pinneburg railway bridge to the Pinnau barrage. 

Kruckau  : from  the Elmshora watermill to the Kruckau barrage. 

Stôr  : from  Pegel Rensing to the Stôr barrage. 

Eider  : from  the Gieselau  Canal to the Eider barrage. 

Nord-Ostsee-Kanal  (Kiel  Canal)  : from  a line  linking the Brunsbuttel  pier heads  to  a 
line  linking  the  Kiel-Holtenau  entry  lights  and  the  Schirnauer  See,  Bergstedter  See, 
Audorfer  See,  Obereidersee  with  Enge,  the  Achterwehrer  canal  and  the  Flemhuder 
See. 

Trave  : from  the  railway  bridge  and  the  Holsten  bridge  (Stadttrave)  in  Liibeck  to  a 
line  linking the two  outer pier heads  of Travemunde and the Pôtenitzer Wick  and  the 
Dassower  See. 

Schlei  : inside a line linking the Schleimiinde pier heads. 

Wismarbucht,  Kirchsee. 

Breitling,  Salzhaff  and  Wismar  harbour  :  seawards  from  the  lines  linking  Hohen 
Wieschendorf  Huk and the Timmendorf  lights and the lights of Gollwitz on the isle of 
Poel  and the southern tip of the Wustrow  peninsula. 

20 

Unterwamow  and Breitling  : seawards  from  the  line linking the  most northern  points 
of the western, middle and eastern mole of Warnemunde. 

Waters,  encircled  by the mainland  and the DarB and Zingst peninsulas  and the islands 
of Hiddensee  and  Rugen  (including  the  Stralsund  harbour)  : towards  the  open  sea  as 
far  as : 

- the latitude 54° 27'  N between the Zingst peninsula and the island  of Bock 
- the line linking the northern tip of the island of Bock with the southern tip of 
the island of Hiddensee 
-  on  the  islands  of  Hiddensee  and  Rugen  (Bug),  the  line  linking  the 
southeastern tip of Neubessin with the Buger Haken. 

Greifswald  Bodden  and Greifswald  harbour  (with Ryck)  : towards the open  sea  as  far 
as the line linking the eastern tip of Thiessower Haken  (Sud perd) with the eastern tip 
of the island or Ruden and ending at the northern tip of the island of Usedom  (54°  10' 
37" N,  13° 4 7 ' 5 1" E). 

Waters,  encircled  by  the  mainland  and  the  island  of  Usedom  (river  Peene  including 
the  Wolgast  harbour,  backwaters,  Stettin  lagoon)  :  towards  the  east  as  far  as  the 
German-Polish border line crossing the  Stettin  lagoon. 

French  Republic 

Seine  : downstream  of the Jeanne d'Arc bridge in Rouen. 

Garonne and Gironde  : downstream  of the Bordeaux  stone bridge. 

Rhône  :  downstream  of  the  Trinquetaille  bridge  in  Aries  and  beyond  towards 
Marseille. 

Dordogne  : downstream  from  the stone bridge at Liboume. 

Loire  :  downstream  from 
downstream  from  the Pirmil bridge on the Pirmil  arm. 

the  haudaudine  bridge  of  the  Madeleine  arm  and 

Kingdom  of the Netherlands 

Dollard. 

Eems. 

Waddenzee  : inclunding the links with the North  Sea. 

Ijsselmeer  : including the Markermeer  and the Ijmeer  but excluding the Gouwzee. 

Rotterdam  Waterweg and the  Scheur. 

'\land Kanaal west from  the Benelux  harbour. 

21 

Hollands Diep. 

Breeddiep, Beerkanaal  and its connected  harbours. 

Haringvliet and Vuile Gat  : including the waterways  between  Goeree-Overflakkee  on 
the one hand  and Voorne-Putten  and Hoekse Waard on the other. 

Hellegat. 

Volkerak. 

Krammer. 

Grevelingenmeer  and  Brouwerschavense  Gat  : including  all  the  waterways  between 
Schouwen-Duiveland and  Goeree-Overflakkee. 

Keten,  Mastgat,  Zijpe,  Krabbenkreek,  Eastern  Scheldt  and  Roompot  : including  the 
waterways  between Walcheren,  Noord-Beveland  and Zuid-Beveland  on the  one  hand 
and  Schouwen-Duiveland  and Tholen on the other hand,  excluding the  Scheldt-Rhine 
Canal. 

Scheldt  and  Western  Scheldt  and  its  mouth  on  the  sea  :  including  the  waterways 
between  Zeeland  Flanders  on the one hand  and Walcheren  and Zuid-Beveland  on the 
other,  excluding the Scheldt-Rhine Canal. 

CHAPTER H 

Zone 3 

Republic  of Austria 

Danube  : from  the border with  Germany to the border with  Slovakia. 

Inn  : from  the mouth  to the Passau-Ingling Power  Station. 

Traun  : from  the mouth  to Km  1.80. 

Enns  : from  the mouth  to Km 2.70 

March:  to Km 6.00 

Kingdom  of Belgium 

Maritime  Schelde (downstream  of Antwerp open anchorage). 

22 

Federal Republic  of Germany 

Danube  : from  Kelheim  (Km 2414.72) to the German-Austrian border. 

Rhine  : from  the German-Swiss border to the German-Netherlands  border. 

Elbe  :  from  the  mouth  of  the  Elbe-Seiten-Canal  to  the  lower  limit  of  the  port  of 
Hamburg. 

Muritz. 

French  Republic 

Rhine. 

Kingdom  of the Netherlands 

Rhine. 

Sneekermeer,  Koevordermeer,  Heegermeer,  Fluessen,  Slotermeer,  Tjeukemeer, 
Beulakkerwijde,  Belterwijde,  Ramsdiep,  Ketelmeer,  Zwartemeer,  Veluwemeer, 
Eemmeer,  Alkmaardermeer,  Gouwzee,  Buiten  Ij,  afesloten  Ij,  Noordzeekanaal,  port 
of  Ijmuiden,  Rotterdam  port  area,  Nieuwe  Maas,  Noord,  Oude  Maas,  Beneden 
Merwede,  Nieuwe  Merwede,  Dordische  Kil,  Boven  Merwede,  Waal,  Bijlandsch 
Canal,  Boven  Rijn,  Pannersdensch  Canal,  Geldersche  Ijssel,  Neder  Rijn,  Lek, 
Amsterdam-Rhine  Canal,  Veerse  Meer,  Schelde-Rhine  Canal  as far  as  the  mouth  in 
the  Volkerak,  Amer,  Bergsche  Maas,  the  Meuse  below  Venlo,  Gooimeer,  Europort, 
Calandkanaal  (east from  the Benelux harbour), Hartelkanaal. 

CHAPTER  m 

Zone 4 

Republic  of Austria 

Thaya  : up to Bernhardsthal. 

March  : above Km 6.00. 

Kingdom  of Belgium 

The entire Belgian network  except the waterways  in Zone 3. 

Federal Republic  of Germany 

All Federal waterways  except those in Zones  1, 2 and  3. 

23 

French Republic 

The entire French network except the waterways in Zones 1, 2 and 3. 

Kingdom of the Netherlands 

All other rivers, canals and inland seas not listed in Zones 1, 2 and 3. 

Italian Republic 

River Po : from Piacenza to the mouth. 

Milan-Cremona Canal, River Po : final stretch of 15 km to the Po. 

River Mincio : from Mantua, Govemolo to the Po. 

Ferrara Waterway : from the Po (Pontelagoscuro), Ferrara to Porto Garibaldi. 

Brondolo and Valle Canals : from the eastern Po to the Venice lagoon. 

Fissero Canal - Tartaro - Canalbianco : from Adria to the eastern Po. 

Venetian coastline : from the Venice lagoon to Grado. 

Grand Duchy of Luxembourg 

Moselle. 

24 

ANNEX II 

Minimum Technical Requirements applicable to Vessels navigating on 
Waterways in Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4 

CONTENTS 

PARTI 

GENERAL 

Article  1.01. 
Article  1.02. 
Article  1.03. 
Article  1.04. 
Article  1.05. 
Article  1.06. 
Article  1.07. 

.Definitions 
.(Left void) 
.(Left void) 
.(Left void) 
.(Left void) 
.Temporary requirements 
.Administrative instructions to the inspection bodies 

Chapter 2 

PROCEDURE 

Article 2.01 
Article  2.02 
Article  2.03 
Article  2.04 
Article  2.05 
Article 2.06 
Article  2.07 
Article 2.08 
Article  2.09 
Article  2.10 
Article  2.11 
Article  2.12 
Article  2.13 
Article  2.14 
Article  2.15 
Article  2.16 
Article 2.17 
Article  2.18 
Article  2.19 

Inspection bodies 
Request for  an inspection 
Presentation of the craft for  inspection 
(Left void) 
Provisional  inspection certificate 
(Left void) 
Particulars in and amendments to the inspection  certificate. 
(Left void) 
Additional  inspection 
Voluntary inspection 
(Left void) 
(Left void) 
(Left void) 
(Left void) 
Expenses 
Information 
Register of inspection certificates 
Official  number 
equivalences and exemptions 

.: 

: 

9 
9 
9 
10 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
13 
13 
13 
13 

25 

PART H 

CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND  RIGGING 

Chapter 3 

SHIPBUILDING  REQUIREMENTS 

Article 3.01 
Article 3.02 
Article 3.03 
Article 3.04 

Basic requirements 
Strength and stability 
Hull... 
Engine and boiler rooms, bunkers 

Chapter 4 

SAFETY  CLEARANCE, FREEBOARD AND DRAUGHT MARKS 

Article 4.01 
Article 4.02 
Article 4.03 
Article 4.04 
Article 4.05 

Safety  clearance 
Freeboard 
Minimum freeboard 
Draught marks 
Maximum  loaded  draught  of  craft  whose  hulls  are not  always  closed 
so as to be sprayproof  and weathertight 

Article 4.06 

Draught scale 

Chapter 5 

MANOEUVRABILITY 

Article 5.01 
Article 5.02 
Article 5.03 
Article 5.04 

Article 5.05 
Article 5.06 
Article 5.07 
Article 5.08 
Article 5.09 
Article 5.10 

General 
Navigation tests 
Test area 
Degree  of  loading  of  vessels  and  trains  of  vessels  during  navigation 

tests 

Use of on-board  facilities  for  navigation test 
Prescribed  maximum  (forward)  speed 
Stopping capacity 
Navigability while going astern 
Capacity for  taking evasive action 
Turning capacity 

' 

15 
15 
16 
17 

18 
18 
20 
20 

21 
22 

23 
23 
23 

24 
24 
24 
24 
25 
25 
25 

26 

Article 6.01 
Article 6.02 
Article 6.03 
Article 6.04 
Article 6.05 
Article 6.06 

Article 6.07 
Article 6.08 
Article 6.09 

Chapter 6 

STEERING  GEAR 

General requirements 
Steering-gear  control system 
Steering-system hydraulic drive 
Power source 
Manual actuation 
Rudder-propeller,  water-jet,  cycloidal-propeller  and  bow-thruster 

systems 
Readouts and monitoring 
Rate-of-turn  regulators 
Acceptance 

Chapter 7 

WHEELHOUSE 

Article 7.01 
Article  7.02 
Article 7.03 

Article 7.04 

Article 7.05 

General 
Unobstructed view 
General  requirements  concerning  control,  display  and  monitoring 

equipment.. * 

Equipment for  controlling,  displaying and monitoring the operation of 
the power plants and steering system 
Control  and  monitoring  of  signal  lights,  light  signals  and  sound 

signals 

Article  7.06 
Article 7.07 

Radar installations  and rate-of-turn  indicators 
Radio  telephony  systems  for  vessels  with  wheelhouses  designed  for 

radar navigation by one person 

Article  7.08 
Article 7.09 
Article 7.10 
Article 7.11 
Article 7.12 
Article  7.13 

Sound links onboard 
Alarm  system 
Heating and ventilation 
Stem-anchor  operating equipment 
Retractable wheelhouses 
the 
Entry 
wheelhouse arrangements for  radar navigation by one person 

inspection  certificate 

in 

that  vessels  have  special 

26 
26 
26 
27 
27 

27 
28 
28 
29 

30 
30 

31 

32 

33 
34 
34 
35 
35 
35 

35 

27 

Chapter 8 

ENGINE DESIGN 

Article 8.01 
Article 8.02 
Article 8.03 
Article 8.04 
Article 8.05 
Article 8.06 
Article 8.07 
Article 8.08 

General 
Safety  equipment 
Power plant 
Engine exhaust system 
Fuel tanks, pipes and accessories 
Bilge pumping and drainage systems 
Oily-water  and drained-oil  stores 
Noise emitted by vessels 

36 
36 
36 
37 
37 
38 
39 
40 

28 

Chapter 9 

ELECTRICAL  EQUIPMENT 

Article 9.01 
Article 9.02 
Article 9.03 
Article 9.04 
Article 9.05 
Article 9.06 
Article 9.07 
Article 9.08 
Article 9.09 
Article 9.10 
Article 9.11 
Article 9.12 
Article 9.13 
Article 9.14 
Article 9.15 
Article 9.16 
Article 9.17 
Article 9.18 
Article 9.19 
Article 9.20 
Article 9.21 

General 
Electricity supply systems 
Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects, water 
Explosion proofing 
Earthing 
Maximum  permissible voltages 
Distribution systems 
Connection to the short or other external networks ...-
Power supply to other craft 
Generators  and motors 
Accumulators 
Connecting installations 
Emergency  circuit breakers 
Fixed installations 
Cables 
Lighting installations 
Signal lights 
Emergency installations 
Alarm  and safety  systems for mechanical  equipment 
Electronic equipment 
Electromagnetic  compatibility 

i: 

Chapter 10 

RIGGING 

Article  10.1 
Article  10.2 
Article  10.3 
Article  10.4 
Article  10.5 

Anchors, chains and anchor hawsers 
Other forms  of rigging 
Fire-fighting  equipment 
Dinghies 
Buoys and life jackets 

Chapter 11 

SAFETY AT WORK  STATIONS 

Article  11.01. 
Article 11.02. 
Article 11.03. 
Article 11.04. 
Article  11.05. 
Article  11.06. 
Article  11.07. 
Article  11.08. 
Article  11.09. 
Article  11.10. 
Article  11.11. 
Article  11.12. 

General 
Protection  against falling 
Dimensions of working spaces 
Gunwale 
.Access to working spaces 
.Exits and  emergency  exits 
.Ladders, steps and similar devices 
.Inside spaces 
. Protection  against noise and vibration. 
.Hatch covers 
.Winches 
.Cranes 

41 
41 
42 
42 
43 
44 
45 
45 
46 
46 
46 
47 
49 
49 
49 
50 
50 
51 
52 
52 
54 

57 
59 
61 
62 

64 
64 
64 
64 
65 
65 
65 
66 
66 
67 
67 
67 

29 

Chapter 12 

ACCOMMODATION 

Article  12.01 
Article  12.02 
Article 12.03 
Article  12.04 
Article  12.05 
Article  12.06 
Article  12.07 

General 
Special design requirements 
Sanitary  installations 
Galleys 
Drinking water 
Heating and ventilation 
Other accommodation  installations 

Chapter 13 

FUEL-FERED HEATING,  COOKING AND REFRIGERATING  EQUIPMENT 

Article  13.01 
Article  13.02 
Article  13.03 

General 
Use of liquid fuels,  oil-fired  equipment 
Vaporising  oil  burner  stoves  and  vaporising  oil  burner  heating 

appliances 

Article  13.04 
Article  13.05 
Article  13.06 
Article  13.07 

Vaporising oil burner stoves 
Vaporising oil burner heating appliances 
Forced-air heating appliances 
Solid fuel  heating 

Chapter  14 

LIQUEFIED  GAS INSTALLATIONS  FOR DOMESTIC  PURPOSES 

..General 

Article  14.01 
Article  14.02 
Article  14.03 
Article  14.04 
Article  14.05 
Article  14.06 
Article  14.07 
Article  14.08 
Article  14.09 
Article  14.10 
Article  14.11 
Article  14.12 
Article  14.13 
Article  14.14....v.. Tests and trials 
Article  14.15 

Installations 
Receptacles 
Location  and arrangement of supply units 
Spare and empty receptacles 
Pressure reducers 
Pressure 
Piping and flexible tubes 
Distribution  system 
Gas-consuming  appliances and their installation 
Ventilation  and evacuation of combustion gases 
Instructions for use and safety 
Acceptance 

Attestation 

70 
70 
71 
72 
72 
73 
73 

74 
74 

75 
75 
76 
76 
77 

78 
78 
78 
79 
79 
79 
80 
80 
80 
81 
81 
82 
82 
82 
83 

30 

Chapter 15 

SPECIAL PROVISIONS  FOR PASSENGER  VESSELS 

Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 
Article 

15.01. 
15.02. 
15.03. 
15.04. 
15.05. 
15.06. 
15.07. 
15.08. 
15.09. 
15.10. 
15.11. 

...General 
...Basic requirements for subdivision of vessels 
...Transverse bulkheads 
...Intact stability  and stability  in the event of a leak 
... Calculation  of the number of passengers on the basis of free  deck area 
...Safety  clearance, freeboard  and draught marks 
...Passenger installations 
... Special requirements for survival  equipment 
... Fire protection  and fire-fighting  in passenger spaces 
...Supplementary  requirements 
...Waste collection  and disposal facilities 

84 
84 
86 
88 
90 
91 
91 
93 
94 
96 
98 

Chapter  16 

SPECIFIC PROVISIONS  CONCERNING 
CRAFT INTENDED TO FORM PART OF A PUSHED OR 
TOWED TRAIN OR OF A BREASTED-UP  FORMATION 

Article  16.01 
Article  16.02 
Article  16.03 
Article  16.04 
Article  16.05 
Article  16.06 
Article  16.07 

Pusher craft 
Pushed  craft 
Craft  designed to propel breasted-up formations 
Craft  designed  for use in trains 
Craft which may be used for towing purposes 
Tests on trains of vessels 
Entries on the certificate 

Chapter 17 

SPECIFIC PROVISIONS  GOVERNING  FLOATING  EQUIPMENT 

Article  17.01 
Article  17.02 
Article  17.03 
Article  17.04 
Article  17.05 
Article  17.06 
Article  17.07 
Article  17.08 
Article  17.09 
Article  17.10 

General 
Exemptions 
Additional  requirements 
Residual  safety  clearance 
Residual freeboard 
Lateral stability tests 
Confirmation  of stability 
Confirmation  of stability  in the case of reduced  residual  freeboard 
Draught marks and draught scales 
Floating  installations without  confirmation  of stability 

99 
99 
100 
100 
100 
101 
101 

102 
102 
103 
103 
103 
104 
104 
106 
107 
107 

Zs\ 

Chapter  18 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING WORKSITE  CRAFT 

Article  18.01...  Operating conditions..... 
Article  18.02 
Article  18.03 
Article  18.04 
Article  18.05 

Implementation of Part II 
Exemptions 
Safety  clearance and freeboard 
Dinghies 

Chapter  19 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  CANAL BARGES 

(Left void) 

Chapter 20 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  SEA-GOING  VESSELS 

(Left void) 

Chapter 21 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  SPORTS  CRAFT 

Article 21.01 

General 

Article 21.02 

Implementation of Part II 

Chapter 22 

STABILITY OF VESSELS CARRYING  CONTAINERS 

Article 22.01 
Article 22.02 

General 
Limit  conditions  and  method  of  calculation  used  in  confirming  the 

stability of vessels carrying non-attached  containers. 

Article 22.03 

Limit  conditions  and  method  of  calculation  for  confirming 

the 

stability of vessels carrying attached  containers 

Article 22.04 

Procedure for  assessing on-board  stability 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  CRAFT LONGER THAN  100 M 

Chapter 22a 

Implementation  of Part 1 
Implementation  of Part II 
Durability, buoyancy  and stability 

Article 22a.01 
Article 22a.02 
Article 22a.03 
Article 22a.04  Manoeuvrability 
Article 22a05....... Additional  equipment 
Article 22a.06 
Article 22a.07 

(Left void) 
Implementation  of Part IV in the event of conversion 

108 
108 
108 
109 
109 

110 

I ll 

I ll 

112 

113 

113 

116 
118 

119 
119 
119 
120 
120 
121 
121 

32 

Article 23.01 
Article 23.02 
Article 23.03 
Article 23.04 
Article 23.05 

(Left void) 
(Left void) 
(Left void) 
(Left void) 
Operating modes 

PART  m 

Chapter 23 

CREWS 

PART IV 

Chapter 24 

TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL PROVISIONS 

Article 24.01 
Article 24.02 

Validity of previous inspections certificates 
Renewal of previous certificates 

122 
122 
122 
122 
122 

123 
123 

33 

Chapter 1 

GENERAL 

Article  1.0.1 

Definitions 

The following  definitions  are contained  in this Directive: 

Types of  craft 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

"craft" : a vessel or item of floating  equipment 

"vessel": an inland waterway vessel or sea-going ship 

"inland  waterway  vessel":  a vessel  intended  solely  or  mainly  for  navigation  on 
inland waterways 

"sea-going  ship":  a vessel  admitted  and  intended  mainly  for  maritime  or  coastal 
navigation 

"self-propelled  craft":  an ordinary self-propelled  craft  or a self-propelled  tanker 

"self-propelled  tanker":  a vessel  intended  for  the carriage of  goods  in fixed  tanks 
and built to navigate independently under its own motive power 

"ordinary  self-propelled  vessel":  a vessel,  other  than  a powered  tanker,  intended 
for  the  carriage  of  goods  and  built  to  navigate  independently  under  its  own 
motive power 

"canal barge": an inland waterway vessel not exceeding 38.5 m in length and  5.05 
m in breadth 

9. 

"tug": a vessel specially built to perform  towing 

34 

10. 

"pusher" : a vessel specially built to propel a pushed train of  craft 

11. 

"barge" : a dumb barge or tank barge 

12. 

13. 

"tank barge":  a vessel  intended  for  the  carriage  of goods  in fixed  tanks  and  built 
to  be towed,  either having  no motive power  of  its  own  or  having  only  sufficient 
motive power to perform  restricted  manoeuvres 

"dumb  barge":  a  vessel,  other  than  a  tank  barge,  intended  for  the  carriage  of 
goods  and  built to be towed,  either having no motive power of  its own or  having 
only sufficient  motive power to perform  restricted  manoeuvres 

14. 

"lighter":  a tank lighter,  ordinary lighter or ship-borne lighter 

15. 

16. 

"tank lighter":  a vessel  intended  for  the carriage  of goods  in fixed  tanks, built  or 
specially  modified  to  be  pushed,  either  having  no  motive  power  of  its  own  or 
having  only  sufficient  motive  power  to  perform  restricted  manoeuvres  when  not 
part of a pushed train of  craft 

"ordinary  lighter":  a vessel,  other than  a tank  lighter,  intended  for  the  carriage  of 
goods  and  built  or  specially  modified  to  be  pushed,  either  having  no  motive 
power  of  its  own  or  having  only  sufficient  motive  power  to  perform  restricted 
manoeuvres when not part of a pushed train of  craft 

17. 

"ship-borne  lighter":  a  pushed  lighter  built  to  be  carried  aboard  sea-going  ships 
and to navigate on inland  waterways 

18. 

"passenger vessel": a vessel built and fitted  out to carry more than  12 passengers 

19. 

"day-excursion vessel": a passenger vessel without overnight passenger  cabins 

20. 

"passenger-cabin vessel" : a passenger vessel with overnight passenger  cabins 

21. 

22. 

23. 

"floating  equipment":  a floating  installation  carrying working gear such as cranes, 
dredgers, pile drivers or  elevators 

"worksite  craft":  an  appropriate  vessel,  built  and  equipped  for  use  at  worksites, 
such as a reclamation  dredger, hopper or pontoon barge, pontoon or block-layer 

"recreational  craft":  a vessel  other  than  a passenger  vessel,  intended  for  sport  or 
pleasure 

35 

24. 

25. 

"floating  establishment":  any  floating  installation  not  normally  intended  to  be 
moved,  such as a swimming bath, dock, jetty or boathouse 

"floating  installation":  a  raft  or  other  structure,  object  or  assembly  capable  of 
navigation, not being a vessel or floating  equipment or  establishment 

Assemblies of  craft 

26. 

"train of craft" : a rigid or towed train of  craft 

27. 

"formation":  the manner in which a train of craft  is assembled 

28. 

"rigid train": a pushed train or breasted-up  formation 

29. 

30. 

31. 

"pushed  train":  a  rigid  assembly  of  craft  of  which  at  least  one  is  positioned  in 
front  of  the  craft  providing  the  power  for  propelling  the  train,  known  as  the 
"pusher(s)";  a train  composed  of  a pusher  craft  and  a pushed  craft  coupled  so  as 
to permit guided articulation is also considered as rigid 

"breasted-up  formation":  an assembly  of  craft  coupled  rigidly  side  by  side,  none 
of which is positioned  in front  of the craft propelling the assembly 

"towed  train":  an  assembly  of  one  or  more  craft,  floating  establishments  or 
floating  installations  towed  by  one  or  more  self-propelled  craft  forming  part  of 
the train 

Particular areas on board 

32. 

"main engine room": space where the propulsion  engines are installed 

33. 

"engine room": space where combustion  engines are installed 

34. 

35. 

36. 

37. 

"boiler  room":  a  space  housing  a  fuel-operated  installation  designed  to  produce 
steam or a thermal  fluid 

"enclosed  superstructure":  a  watertight,  rigid,  continuous  structure  with  rigid 
walls joined  to the deck  in a permanent  and watertight manner 

"wheelhouse"  the  area  which  houses  all  the  control  and  monitoring  instruments 
necessary for  manoeuvring the vessel 

"accommodation"  a  space  intended  for  the  use  of  persons  normally  living  on 
board,  including  galleys,  storage  space  for  provisions,  toilets  and  washing 
facilities,  laundry  facilities,  landings and gangways, but not the wheelhouse 

36 

38. 

39. 

40. 

"hold":  part  of the vessel,  delimited  fore  and  aft  by  bulkheads,  opened  or  closed 
by means  of hatch  covers,  intended  for  the  carriage  of  goods, whether  packaged 
or in bulk, or for housing tanks not forming part of the hull 

"fixed  tank":  a tank joined  to the vessel, the walls of the tank  consisting  either  of 
the hull itself or of a casing separate from  the hull 

"working  station":  an  area  where  members  of  the  crew  carry  out  their  duties, 
including gangway,  derrick  and ship's boat 

41. 

"passageway":  an area intended for the normal movement of persons and goods 

Marine engineering  terms 

42. 

43. 

44. 

45. 

"plane  of  maximum  draught":  the  water  plane  corresponding  to  the  maximum 
draught at which the craft  is authorised to navigate 

"safety  clearance":  the  distance  between  the  plane  of  maximum  draught  and  the 
parallel plane passing through the lowest point above which the craft  is no  longer 
deemed to be watertight 

"freeboard  (F)":  the  distance  between  the  plane  of  maximum  draught  and  a 
parallel plane passing through  the lowest  point  of the gunwale  or,  in the  absence 
of a gunwale, the lowest point of the upper edge of the hull planking or plating 

"margin  line": An  imaginary  line  drawn  on the  side  plating  not  less  than  10 cm 
below the bulkhead  deck and not less than  10 cm below the lowest  non-watertight 
point of the side plating.  If there  is no  bulkhead  deck,  a line  drawn  not  less  than 
10 cm  below  the  lowest  line up  to which  the  outer  plating  is watertight  shall  be 
used. 

46. 

"water displacement  (V)" : the immersed volume of the vessel in m3 

47. 

"displacement (D)": the total weight of the vessel, inclusive of cargo, in t 

48. 

49. 

50. 

51. 

"block  coefficient  (d)": the ratio between  the water  displacement  and  the  product 
of length, breadth and draught T 

"sheer plan above water  (S)": sheer plan of the vessel above the waterline in m2 

"bulkhead  deck":  the  deck  to  which  the  required  watertight  bulkheads  are  taken 
and from  which the freeboard  is measured 

"bulkhead" : a wall  of  a given  height, usually  vertical,  partitioning  the vessel  and 
delimited  by the bottom  of the vessel, the plating or other bulkheads 

37 

52. 

"transverse  bulkhead":  a bulkhead  extending  from  one  side  of  the  vessel  to  the 
other 

53. 

"wall" : a dividing surface, usually vertical 

54. 

"partition wall" : a non-watertight wall 

55. 

"length (L)" : the maximum length of the hull, excluding rudder and  bowsprit 

56. 

"length  overall":  the  greatest  length  of  the  craft  in  m,  including  all  fixed 
installations  such  as parts  of  the  steering  system  or  power  plant,  mechanical  or 
similar devices 

57. 

"length (LF)": the length of the hull in m, measured  at maximum  draught 

58. 

59. 

60. 

61. 

62. 

63. 

64. 

"breadth (B)": the maximum breadth of the hull in m, measured  to the outer  edge 
of the shell plating (excluding paddle wheels, rubbing strakes, etc.) 

"overall  breadth":  the  maximum  breadth  of  the  craft  in  m,  including  all  fixed 
equipment such as paddle wheels, plinths, mechanical  devices and the like 

"breadth  (BF":  breadth  of  the  hull  in  m,  measured  from  the  outside  of  the  side 
plating at the maximum  draught line 

"side  height  (H)": the  shortest  vertical  distance  between  the  top  of  the  keel  and 
the lowest point of the deck on the side of the vessel 

"draught  (T)": the vertical  distance between the lowest moulded  point  of  the  hull 
or the keel and the maximum  draught line 

"forward  perpendicular":  the vertical  line  at the forward  point  of  the  intersection 
of the hull with the maximum  draught line 

"clear  width  of  gunwale": the  distance  between  the vertical  line  passing  through 
the most prominent part of the gunwale on the  coaming side and the vertical  line 
passing  through  the  inside  edge  of  the  slip  guard  (guard-rail,  foot  rail)  on  the 
outer side of the gunwale 

Steering  system 

65. 

66. 

67. 

"steering  system"  all  the  equipment  required  for  steering  the  vessel,  such  as  to 
ensure the manoeuvrability  laid down in Chapter  5 of this Regulation 

"rudder": the rudder or rudders, with  shaft,  including the rudder  quadrant  and  the 
components connecting with the steering  apparatus 

"steering,  apparatus":  the  part  of  the  steering  system  which  produces 
movement of the rudder 

the 

38 

68. 

69. 

70. 

71. 

72. 

73. 

74. 

75. 

"steering control": the steering-apparatus  control, between the power source and 
the steering apparatus 

"power  source":  the  power  supply  to  the  steering  control  and  the  steering 
apparatus produced by an on-board network,  batteries or an internal  combustion 
engine 

"drive  unit":  the  component  parts  of  and  circuitry  for  the  operation  of  a 
power-driven steering control 

"steering apparatus control unit": the control for  the steering apparatus, its drive 
unit and its power source 

"manual  drive":  a system  whereby  manual  operation  of the hand  wheel,  moves 
the  rudder  by  means  of  a  mechanical  or  hydraulic  transmission,  without  any 
additional power source 

"manually-operated  hydraulic  drive":  a  manual  control  actuating  a  hydraulic 
transmission 

"rate-of-turn regulator": equipment which automatically produces and maintains a 
given rate of turn of the vessel in accordance with preselected values 

"wheelhouse  arranged  for  steering  on  radar  by  one  person":  a  wheelhouse 
arranged  in  such  a  way  that,  during  navigation  on  radar,  the  vessel  can  be 
manoeuvred by one person 

Properties of structural components and materials 

76. 

77. 

78. 

79. 

80. 

"watertight":  a structural  component  or  device fitted  out in such a manner  as to 
prevent any ingress of water 

"spray-proof and weathertight": a structural component or device so fitted  that in 
normal conditions it allows only a negligible quantity of water to penetrate 

"gastight": a structural component or device so fitted  as to prevent the ingress of 
gas and vapours 

"non-combustible":  material  which  does  not  bum  or  give  off  inflammable 
vapours  in  a  sufficient  quantity  to  ignite  when  it  reaches  a  temperature  of 
approximately 750°C 

"fire-resistant":  material which does not readily catch fire, or the surface of which 
does not readily catch fire, and which impedes the spread of fire in an appropriate 
manner 

81. 

"fire-retardant":  a  structural  component  or  device  which  meets  certain 
fire-resistance requirements 

39 

Other  concepts 

82. 

83a. 

83b. 

"approved  classification  society":  the  following  are  considered  to  be  "approved 
classification  societies":  Germanischer  Lloyd,  Bureau  Veritas  and  Lloyds 
Register of  Shipping 

"Community  certificate":  a certificate  which,  in accordance with  Article  3 of  the 
Directive,  is  issued  by  the  competent  authorities  of  a  Member  State  for  vessels 
complying with the technical requirements laid down in this Annex 

"supplementary  Community  certificate":  according  to  Article  4(2)  of 
the 
Directive,  all vessels  require  a supplementary  Community  certificate,  in  addition 
to the Rhine  certificate,  for  zones  1 and  2  and  for  zones 3 and 4,  if they  wish  to 
take advantage of the reduction in technical requirements on these waterways 

84. 

"inspection  bodies":  competent  authorities  appointed  by  the  Member  States, 
which  inspect vessels  on  the  basis  of  the  provisions  in  this  Annex  and  issue  the 
certificate(s) 

Article  1.02 

(Left  void) 

Article  1.03 

(Left  void) 

Article  1.04 

(Left  void) 

Article  1.05 

(Left  void) 

Article  1.06 

Temporary requirements 

After  invoking  the  procedure  provided  for  in  Article 9  of  the  Directive  the  competent 
authority may  issue temporary  requirements where this would  seem  essential,  in order  to 
enable  tests  to  be  carried  out  without  disrupting  the  safety  or  orderly  functioning  of 
navigation.  Those requirements  shall be valid for  a maximum period of three years. 

40 

Article 1.07 

Administrative instmctions to the inspection bodies 

In order to make the implementation  of this Directive easier and uniform  administrative 
instructions  to  the  inspection  bodies  may  be  adopted  if  the procedure  provided  for  in 
Article 19 of the Directive is applied. 

Those  administrative  instructions  shall  be  brought  to  the  attention  of  the  inspection 
bodies by the competent authorities. 

.. The inspection bodies shall follow those administrative instructions. 

41 

Chapter 2 

PROCEDURE 

Article 2.01 

Inspection  bodies 

Inspection  bodies  shall  be  set  up  by  the  Member  States  in  certain  appropriate 

1. 
ports. 

2. 

Inspection bodies shall consist of a chairman and experts. 

At least the following will form  part of each Body as experts: 

a)  an official  from  the administration that is responsible for inland waterways; 

b)  an expert on the design of inland waterway vessels and their engines; 

c)  a nautical  expert in possession of a navigation  certification. 

The  Chairman  and  the  experts  within  each  Body  shall  be  designated  by  the 

3. 
authorities in the state from  which they come. 

Inspection  bodies  may  be  assisted  by  specialist  experts  in  accordance  with  the 

4. 
national provisions  applying. 

Article 2.02 

Request for  an inspection 

1. 
The  procedure  for  making  a request  for  an inspection  and  establishing  the  place 
and time of that inspection fall within the powers of the authorities issuing the  certificate. 
The  inspection  body  shall  determine  which  documents  are  to  be  submitted  to  it.  The 
procedure  shall  take  place  in  such  a  way  as  to  ensure  that  the  inspection  may  be 
conducted within  a reasonable period following  the lodging of the request. 

The  owner  of  a  craft  that  is  not  subject  to  this  Directive,  or  his  representative, 
2. 
may  request  an  inspection  certificate.  His  request  will  be  met  if  the  vessel  fulfils  the 
requirements  of this Directive. 

Article  2.03 

Presentation  of the craft for  inspection 

1. 
The  owner,  or  his  representative,  shall  present  the  craft  in  an  unladen,  cleaned 
and  rigged  state.  He  shall  provide  any  assistance  needed  for  the  inspection,  such  as 
providing  an  appropriate  dinghy  and  staff,  and  uncovering  any  parts  of  the  hull  or 
fittings  that are not directly accessible or visible. 

42 

2. 
The  inspection  body  shall  demand  a  dry  inspection  on  the  first  occasion.  That 
dry  inspection  may  be  dispensed  with  if  a  classification  certificate  or  a  certificate  from 
an  approved  classification  society  to  the  effect 
that  the  construction  meets  its 
requirements  can be produced.  Where there is a supplementary  or special  inspection  the 
inspection body may require an inspection out of the water. 

The inspection  body  shall  conduct  running  tests  during  an  initial  inspection  of  powered 
barges or trains of barges or where major  changes are made to the propulsion  or  steering 
equipment. 

The  inspection  body  may  require  further  operational  tests  and  other  supporting 

3. 
documents.  That provision  shall also apply during the building of the  craft. 

Article  2.04 

(left  void) 

Article  2.05 

Provisional  inspection  certificate 

1. 

The inspection body may issue a provisional  inspection  certificate: 

a)  to  craft  intended  to  travel  to  a  selected  inspection  body  4h  order  to  obtain  an 

inspection  certificate; 

b)  to  craft  whose  inspection  certificate  has  been  temporarily  withdrawn  in  one  of  the 

instances referred  to in Article 2.07 or Articles  12 and  16 of this directive; 

c)  to  craft  whose  inspection  certificate 

is  in  preparation  following  a  successful 

inspection; 

d)  to craft  where not all of the  conditions required  for  obtaining  an inspection  certificate 
as  referred  to  in  Annex  III  (Community  certificate)  or  Annex  IV  (additional 
Community  certificate)  have been met: 

e)  to  craft  having  been  so  damaged  that  their  state  no  longer  complies  with  the 

certificate; 

f)  to  floating  installations  or  equipment  where  the  authorities  responsible  for  special 
transport  operations  make  the  authorisation  to  carry  out  a special  transport  operation 
subject  to  obtaining  such  an  inspection  certificate.  Special  transport  operations  may 
only  be  carried  out  under  a  special  authorisation  by  the  authorities  overseeing  the 
journeys  to  be  made  They  shall  in  each  instance  be  subject  to  the  requirements 
imposed  by  those  authorities.  For  each  special  transport  operation  a skipper  shall  be 
appointed  who  holds  a navigation  certificate  for  the  type  of vessel  and journey  to  be 
made. 

43 

2. 
The temporary  inspection  certificate  shall be drawn up using the model  set out in 
Annex VI  where  the navigability  of  the craft,  floating  installation  or floating  equipment 
seems to have been adequately  ensured. 

This will include the conditions  considered necessary by the inspection body  and shall  be 
valid: 

a)  in  the  cases  referred  to  in  Section  1(a),  (d-f)  for  a  single  specific  trip  to  be  made 

within  a suitable period that shall not exceed one month; 

b)  in the cases referred  to in Section  1, (b) and (c), for  an appropriate  duration. 

Article 2.06 

(left  void) 

Article 2.07 

Particulars  in and amendments to the inspection certificate 

1. 
The  owner  of  a  craft,  or  his  representative,  shall  bring  to  the  notice  of  an 
inspection body  any change in the name or ownership  of a craft,  any remeasurement,  and 
any  change  in the official  number,  registration  number  or home  port,  and  shall  send  the 
inspection  certificate  to that body for  amendment. 

Any  inspection  body  may  add  any  information  or  change  to  the  inspection 

2. 
certificate. 

Where  an  inspection  body  adds  any  alteration  or  information  to  a  certificate  it 

3. 
shall inform  the inspection body having delivered the certificate thereof. 

Article 2.08 

(Left  void) 

Article 2.09 

Additional  inspection 

Craft  shall  be  subjected  to  an  additional  inspection  before  expiry  of  their 

1. 
inspection  certificate. 

2. 
Following  a justified  request  by  the  owner  or  his  representative,  the  inspection 
body  may,  by  way  of  an  exception,  and  without  any  further  inspections,  grant  an 
extension  of  the  validity  of  the  certificate  for  not  more  than  one  year.  That  extension 
will be granted  in writing  and shall be kept on board the  craft. 

3. 
The  inspection  body  conducting  the  additional  inspection  shall  again  lay  down 
the  period  of  validity  of  the  inspection  certificate  in  accordance  with  the  results  of  that 
inspection. 

44 

The  period  of  validity  shall  be  entered  on  the  inspection  certificate  and  brought  to  the 
attention to the body having issued that  certificate. 

4. 
If,  rather than have its period  of validity  extended,  as in  Section  3, an  inspection 
certificate  is  replaced  by  a  new  version,  the  earlier  certificate  shall  be  returned  to  the 
inspection body having issued it. 

Article  2.10 

Voluntary inspection 

The owner of  a craft,  or his representative,  may voluntarily  request  an inspection  of  this 
in  addition  to  either the  special  inspections  referred  to  in  Article  15 of  this  Directive  or 
the additional  inspections referred  to in Article 2.09. 

That request for  an inspection  shall be acted upon. 

Article  2.11 

(Left  void) 

Article  2.12 

(Left  void) 

Article  2.13 

(Left  void) 

Article  2.14 

(Left  void) 

Article  2.15 

Expenses 

The  owner  of  a  craft,  or  his  representative,  shall  bear  all  of  the  costs  arising  from  the 
inspection of the vessel  and the issue of the certificate  in accordance with  a special  set of 
charges drawn up by each of the Member  States. 

45 

Article  2.16 

Information 

Any  persons  expressing  a  well-founded  interest  may  be  informed  of  the  contents  of  a 
certificate  by  the  inspection  body  having  issued  this,  and  may,  at  their  own  expense 
receive extracts or copies of the certificates  designated  as such that have been certified  as 
true. 

Article 2.17 

Register  of inspection  certificates 

Inspection  bodies  shall  assign  an  order  number  to  the  certificates  they  issue. 

1. 
They shall keep a register of all of the certificates  they issue. 

Inspection  bodies  shall  keep  a  collection  of  the  minutes,  or  a  copy  of  all  of  the 
2. 
certificates  they  have  issued,  and  shall  enter  on  these  any  information  and  alterations, 
together with any certificate  cancellations  and replacements. 

Article 2.18 

Official number 

1. 
The  inspection  body  having  issued  an  inspection  certificate  for  a  craft  registered 
in  a Member  State  or  whose  home  port  is  located  in  one  of  those  States  shall  enter  on 
that  certificate  the official  number  assigned  to that craft  by the competent  department  of 
the State in which the craft  has been registered  or has its home port. 

As far  as craft  from  non-member  states are concerned the official  number to be affixed  to 
the  inspection  certificate  shall  be  assigned  by  the  competent  department  of  the  State  in 
which the inspection body having issued that certificate  is located. 

These requirements  shall not apply to sea-going vessels or recreational  craft.  . 

2. 
The official  number shall  remain  invariable throughout the existence  of the  craft. 
However,  if  that  craft  is  registered  in  another  State  or  if  its  home  port  is  transferred 
there,  the  official  number  will  no  longer  be valid.  The  inspection  certificate  must  then 
be submitted to an inspection body which  shall  delete the official  number that has  ceased 
to  be  valid  and,  if  necessary,  shall  enter  the  new  official  number  assigned  by  the 
competent  department. 

Article  2.19 

Equivalences  and  exemptions 

1. 
Where  the  provisions  of  Part  II  require  the use,  or  presence,  on  board  a craft  of 
certain  materials,  installations  or  items  of  equipment,  or  the  adoption  of  certain  design 
aspects  or  certain  arrangements,  the  inspection  body,  after  invoking  the  procedure 
provided  for  in Article  19 of the directive, may  permit the use, or presence,  on board  the 
said  craft  of other materials, installations  or items of  equipment,  or the adoption  of  other 
design features  or other arrangements where these are recognised to be equivalent. 

46 

2. 
The inspection body may issue an inspection certificate  on a trial basis and for a 
limited  period  to  a specific  craft  incorporating  new technical  requirements  that  depart 
from those of Part H, provided those requirements offer  adequate safety. 

3.  The equivalences  and exemptions referred  to in Sections  1 and 2 shall be referred  to 
in the inspection certificate.  The Commission shall be informed  of the equivalences and 
departments referred to in Sections 1  and 2. 

47 

PART II 

Chapter 3 

SHIPBUILDING  REQUIREMENTS 

Article 3.01 

Basic requirement 

Vessels shall be built in accordance with the state of the art. 

Article 3.02 

Strength and stability 

The hull  shall be sufficiently  strong to withstand  all  of the stresses  to which  it is 

1. 
normally  subjected; 

(a) 

in  the  case  of  new  structures  or  major  conversions  affecting  vessel  strength, 
adequate  strength  shall  be  demonstrated  by  presenting  design  calculation  proof. 
That proof  is not required  where a classification  certificate  or a certificate  from  an 
approved  classification  society is submitted; 

(b)  where there is an inspection  as referred  to in Article 2.09 the minimum  thicknesses 
of  the  bottom,  oXrter "bilge  and  vertical  side  plates  shall  be  checked  in  accordance 
with the following  conditions: 

Minimum  thickness  t^  is  given  by  the  highest  of  the  values  resulting  from  the 
following  formulae: 

1 •  tmin =  f°r  vessels that are longer than 40 m: f • b • c (2.3 + 0.04 L) [mm]; 

for vessels not more than 40 m in length: tmin = f • b • c (1,5 + 0,06 L) [mm], 
however,  not less than 3.00 mm 

2- tmin = 0.0005  • a^T  [mm] 

where: 

a = outer-hull plate clearance [mm]; 
f = outer hull plate clearance  factor: 

f=  1 fora>500mm, 
f=  1  +0.0013  (a - 500) for  a > 500 mm 

b = factor  for  bottom, skin or bilge plates 

b =  1.0 for bottom  plates and vertical  side plates 
b =  1.25  for outer bilge plates. 

f  =. 1 may  be  taken  for  the  outer-hull  plate  clearances  when  calculating  the  minimum 
thickness  of  the  vertical  side  plates..  However,  the  minimum  thickness  of  the  bilge 
plates may in no case be less than that of the bottom plates and vertical side plates. 

42 

c = factor for the type of structure 

c  =  0.95  for  vessels  with  double bottom  and  side plating  where the wall 

surrounding the hold is vertical below the coaming 

c = 1.0 for all other types of structure. 

The minimum values calculated  in accordance with the method  are limit values  taking 
account of  normal, uniform  wear,  and provided  that shipbuilding  steel  is used  and that 
the internal structural  components such as floor  plates, ribs, longitudinal  and transverse 
bearers  are in a good state and that no alteration  to the hull  assumes  any  longitudinal-
rigidity  overload. 
As soon as these values are no longer achieved the plates in question must be repaired or 
replaced.  However,  lesser  thicknesses,  of  10%  maximum,  are  acceptable  at  certain 
points. 
2. The stability of vessels shall correspond to their intended use. 

Article 3.03 

Hull 

1. Bulkheads rising up to the deck or, where there is no deck, up to the freeboard,  shall 
be installed at the following points: 

(a)  A collision bulkhead  at a suitable  distance from  the front  in  such  a way that the 
buoyancy  of  the  laden  vessel  is  ensured,  with  a  residual  safety  clearance  of 
100 mm  if  water  enters  the  watertight  compartment  ahead  of  the  collision 
bulkhead. 

As a general rule, the requirement referred  to in section 1 shall be considered to 
have been met if the collision bulkhead has been installed at a distance of between 
0.04 L and 0.04 L + 2 m measured from the front perpendicular line in the plane of 
maximum 
draft. 
If this distance exceeds 0.04 L + 2 m the requirement  set out in section 2 shall be 
proved via calculation. 
The distance may be reduced to 0.03 L.  In that case the requirement referred  to in 
section 1 shall be proved  by  calculation  on the assumption that  the  compartment 
ahead of the collision bulkhead and those adjacent have all been filled with water. 

(b)  A rear-beak bulkhead at a suitable distance from  the stem where the vessels length 

exceeds 25 m. 

2.  No  accommodation  or  equipment  needed  for  vessel  safety  or  operation  may  be 
located ahead of the plane of the collision bulkhead.  This requirement shall not apply to 
anchor lines. 

3.  The accommodation, engine rooms and boilers, and the workspaces forming part of 
these, shall be separated from the holds by watertight transverse bulkheads that extend up 
to the deck. 

4.  The accommodation shall be separated from the engine rooms and boilers, and from 
the holds, by  gastight bulkheads  and  shall be  directly  accessible  from  the  deck.  If  no 
such access has been provided an emergency exit must also lead directly to the deck. 

5.  The bulkheads specified  in sections 1 and 3 and the separation of areas specified  in 
section 4 shall not contain any apertures. 

49 

However,  doors  in  the  stem  bulkhead  and  penetrations,  in  particular  for  shafts  and 
pipework,  shall be permitted where they are so designed that the effectiveness  of those 
bulkheads and of the separation of areas is not impaired.  The doors in the stem bulkhead 
shall on both sides bear the following easily legible instruction: 

"Door to be closed immediately after use". 

6.  The water inlets and discharges, and the pipework connected to these, shall be such 
that no unintentional ingress of water into the vessel is possible. 

Article 3.04 

Engine and boiler rooms,  bunkers 

1.  Engine or boiler rooms shall be arranged  in such a way that the equipment therein 
can be operated, serviced and maintained easily and safely. 

2.  The  liquid-fuel  or  lubricant  bunkers,  and  accommodation,  may  not  have  any 
common  services  which  are  under  the  static  pressure  of  the  liquid  when  in  normal 
service. 

3.  Engine room, boiler room and bunker bulkheads, ceilings and doors shall be made 
of steel or equivalent non-flammable material. 

4.  Engine  and boiler rooms  and  other premises  in which  inflammable  or toxic gases 
are likely to escape shall be capable of being adequately ventilated. 

5.  Companionways  and  ladders  providing  access  to  engine  and  boiler  rooms  and 
bunkers shall be firmly  attached and be made of steel or an equivalent material in terms 
of mechanical strength and  fireproofing. 

6.  Engine and boiler rooms shall have two exits of which one may be an emergency 
exit. 

The second exit may be dispensed with if: 

a) the total floor area (average length x average width) of the engine or boiler room does 

not exceed 35 m  and 

b) the  path  between  each  point  where  servicing  or  maintenance  operations  are  to  be 
carried out and the exit, or foot of the companionway near the exit providing access to 
the outside, is not longer than 5 m and that 

c)  a fire  extinguisher  is located  at the servicing point that is furthest  removed  from  the 
exit door and also, by way of a departure from  Article 10.03, section  1(e), where the 
installed power of the engines does not exceed  100 kW. 

7.  The maximum permissible sound pressure level in the engine rooms shall be 110 dB 
(A).  The  measuring  points  shall  be  selected  as  a  function  of  the  maintenance  work 
needed during normal operation of the plant located therein. 

50 

Chapter 4 

SAFETY CLEARANCE, FREEBOARD AND DRAUGHT  MARKS 

Article 4.01 

Safety clearance 

1.  The safety  clearance shall be at least 300 mm. 

2.  The  safety  clearance  in  the  case  of  vessels  whose  apertures  cannot  be  closed  by 
spray-  and  storm-proof  devices,  and  for  vessels  sailing with  their holds uncovered,  shall 
be increased  in such a way that each of those apertures  shall be at least  500 mm from  the 
plane of maximum  draught. 

Article  4.02 

Freeboard 

1.  The freeboard  of vessels with  a continuous  deck,  without  sheer  and  superstructures 
shall be  150 mm. 

2.  The  freeboard  of  vessels  with  sheer  and  superstructures  shall  be  calculated  via  the 
following  formula: 

Pv *  S ev  +  Pa '  S ea 

F  =  1 5 0 ( 1 - a )- 

[mm] 

15 

where: 
a  is a correction coefficient  that takes account of all of the superstructures  involved; 

pv 

Pa 

is a coefficient  for  correcting the effect  of the front  sheer resulting from  the  presence 
of superstructures  in the front  quarter of length L of the vessel; 

is  a  coefficient  correcting  the  effect  of,  respectively,  the  rear  sheer  resulting  from 
the presence of superstructures  in the rear quarter of length L of the vessel; 

Sev  is the effective  front  sheer in mm; 

Sea  is the effective  rear sheer in mm. 

3.  The coefficient  a  is calculated via the following  formula: 

Zlea + H em  + Zley 

a  = 

where: 
lem 
corresponding to half of length L of the vessel; 

is  the  effective  length  in  m  of  the  superstructures  located  in  the  median  part 

51 

lev  is the effective  length, in m, of a superstructure  in the front  quarter of vessel length 

L; 

lea  is the effective  length, in m, of a superstmcture in the rear quarter of vessel length L. 

The effective  length of a superstructure is calculated via the following  formula: 

b 

h 

l em=  1(2,5; 

1,5) • 

[m] 

B 

b 

0.36 

h 

lev resp. lea = 1 (2,5 • 

1,5) • 

[m]. 

Bl 

0.36 

where: 

1 

b 

is the effective  length, in m, of the superstructure involved; 

is the width, in m, of the superstructure involved; 

Bj  is the width of the vessel, in m, measured on the outside of the vertical sideplates at 

deck level halfway  along the superstmcture involved; 

h 

is the height, in m, of the superstructure involved.  However, in the case of hatches, 
h is obtained by reducing the safety  semi-distance referred  to in Article 4.01 by the 
height of the coamings.  In no case will a value exceeding 0.36 m be taken for h. 

h 

h 

If  —  resp.  —  is less than 0.6 the bracket value shall be taken to be zero, i.e. that the 

B 

^ 

effective  length le of the superstmcture will be zero. 

4.  Coefficients  |3v and pa are calculated via the following  formulae: 

3* le 
L 

3.  le 

a 

L 

Pv= l-

5.  The effective  rear/front  sheers Sev/Sea are calculated via the following  formulae: 

Sev=Sv

#p 

Sea=S3«p 

52 

where: 

Sv is the actual sheer at the front,  in mm;  however Sv must not be taken to Le more  than 
1 000mm; 

Sa is the  actual  sheer  at the rear,  in mm;  however  Sa may not be taken  to be more  than 
500mm; 

p is a coefficient  calculated by the following  formula: 

X 

p=  4  • 

x  is the abscissa, measured  from  the extremity  of the point where the sheer is  0.25  Sv/S£ 
respectively  (see drawing). 

Sy •ici  Ss 

However,  coefficient  p will not be taken to be more than  1. 

If  pa  • Sea is greater than  pv  • Se^  the value of  (3V . Sev will be taken  as being  the 

6. 
value for  (3a.  Sea. 

Article  4.03 

Minimum  freeboard 

In view  of the reductions  referred  to in Article 4.02 the minimum  freeboard  shall  not  be 
less than 0 mm. 

Article  4.04 

Draught  marks 

1. 
The  plane  of  maximum  draught  shall  be  determined  in  such  a  way  that  the 
specifications  concerning  minimum  freeboard  and  minimum  safety  clearance  are  both 
met  at the same time.  However,  for  safety  reasons, the inspection  body  may  lay  down  a 
neater value for the safety  clearance or  freeboard. 

The  plane  of  maximum  draught  shall  be  indicated  by  means  of  highly  visible, 

indelible draught marks. 

53 

3. 
The draught marks  consist of a rectangle 300 mm long and 40 mm  deep, the  base 
of which  is horizontal  and  coincides with the plane of the maximum  authorised  draught. 
Any differing  draught marks shall include such a rectangle. 

Vessels shall have at least three pairs of draught marks of which one pair shall be 
4. 
centrally  located  and the two others located,  respectively,  at a distance from  the bow  and 
stem that is equal to roughly one-sixth of the length. 

However, 

a)  where a vessel is less than 40 m in length it will suffice  to affix  two  pairs of marks  at 
a distance from  the bow and stem, respectively, that is equal to a quarter of the length; 

b) where  boats  are  not  intended  for  the  carriage  of  goods,  a  pair  of  marks  located 

roughly half way along the vessel will  suffice. 

5. 
Marks  or  indications which  cease to be valid  following  a further  inspection  shall 
be  deleted  or  marked  as  being  no  longer  valid  under  the  supervision  of  the  inspection 
body.  If a draught mark  should  disappear  it may  only be replaced under the  supervision 
of an inspection body. 

6. 
Where  a vessel  has  been  measured  in  implementation  of  the  Convention  on  the 
gauging  of  inland  waterway  vessels  and the  plane  of  the  measurement  marks  meets  the 
requirements  of  this  regulation  those  measurement  marks  shall  take  the  place  of  the 
draught marks; this shall be mentioned  in the  certificate. 

Article  4.05 

Maximum  loaded draught of craft 
whose hulls are not always closed 
so as to be sprayproof and  weathertight 

If  the  plane  of  maximum  draught  of  a vessel  is  determined  by  assuming  that  the  holds 
may be closed  in such a way as to make them  spray and weatherproof  and  if the  distance 
between  the plane of maximum  draught  and  the upper  edge of the  coamings  is less  than 
500 mm the maximum  draught for  sailing with uncovered holds must be  determined. 

The following  statement shall be entered on the  certificate: 

"Where the hold hatches are totally or partly covered the vessel may only be loaded up to 
... mm below the draught marks". 

54 

Article 4.06 

Draught scales 

Vessels whose draught may exceed 1 m shall bear a draught scale on each of their 

1. 
sides towards the stem;  they may bear additional draught scales. 

2. 
The zero points on each draught scale shall be taken vertically to this within the 
plane mnning parallel to the plane of maximum draught passing through the lowest point 
of the hull or of the keel where such exists.  The vertical  distance above the zero point 
shall be graduated  in decimetres.  That graduation  shall be located  on each scale,  from 
the unladen water line up to  100 mm above the maximum draught by means of punched 
or  chiselled  marks,  and  shall  be  painted  in  the  form  of  a  highly-visible  band  in  two 
alternating  colours.  That graduation  shall be identified  by  at least five  figures  in  five 
decimetres marked next to the scale and at the top of this. 

3. 
The  two  stem  measurement  scales  affixed  in  pursuance  of  the  Convention 
referred  to in Article 4.04, section 6, may replace the draught scales, provided  that they 
include  a  graduation  that  meets  the  requirements  plus,  where  appropriate,  figures 
indicating the draught. 

55 

Chapter 5 

MANOEUVRABILITY 

Article  5.01 

General 

Vessels and. trains of vessels shall display adequate navigability  and  manoeuvrability. 

Unpowered  vessels intended  to be towed  shall  meet the  specific  requirements  laid  down 
by the inspection body. 

Powered  vessels  and  trains  of  vessels  shall  meet  the  requirements  set  out  in  Articles 
5.02-5.10. 

Article  5.02 

Navigation  tests 

Navigability  and manoeuvrability  shall  be checked  by means  of navigation  tests. 

1. 
The following,  in particular, shall be examined: 

maximum  specified  (forward)  speed 
stopping capacity 
capacity for travelling in reverse 
capacity for evasive action 
turning capacity 

(Article  5.06); 
(Article 5.07); 
(Article 5.08); 
(Article  5.09); 
(Article 5.10). 

The inspection  body may  dispense with  all  or part of the tests where  compliance 

2. 
with the navigability  and manoeuvrability requirements  is proven in another manner. 

Article  5.03 

Test area 

The  navigation  tests  referred  to  in  Article 5.02  shall  be  carried  out  on  areas  of 

1. 
inland waterways that have been designated by the competent authorities. 

2. 
Those test areas shall be situated  on  a stretch  of mnning  or stagnant water that  is 
if possible straight,  at least 2 km long and sufficiently  wide  and is equipped  with  highly-
distinctive marks for  determining the position of the vessel. 

3. 
It must be  possible  for  the  inspection  body  to  plot  the  hydrological  data  such  as 
depth  of  water,  width  of  navigable  channel  and  average  speed  of  the  current  in  the 
navigation  area as a function  of the various water levels. 

56 

Article  5.04 

Degree  of loading of vessels and trains of vessels during navigation tests 

During  navigation  tests  vessels  and  trains  of  vessels  intended  to  carry  goods  shall  be 
loaded  to  at  least  70%  of  their  tonnage  and  loading,  distributed  in  such  a  way  as  to 
ensure  a horizontal  attitude  as  far  as possible.  If  the  tests  are  carried  out  with  a  lesser 
load the approval for downstream navigation shall be restricted to that loading. 

Article  5.05 

Use ofon-boardfacilities  for  navigation test 

1. 
During the navigation  test  all of the  equipment  referred  to in  items  34  and  52  of 
the certificate  which may be actuated from  the wheelhouse  may be used,  apart from  any 
anchor. 

However,  during  the  test  involving  turning  into  the  current  referred  to  in 

•2. 
Article 5.10, the anchors may be used. 

Article  5.06 

Prescribed  maximum (forward) speed 

Vessels  and trains of  vessels  shall  achieve  a speed  in relation  to  the water  of  at 

1. 
least  13 km/h.  That condition is not mandatory where pusher tugs are operating solo. 

The  inspection  body  may  grant  exemptions  to  vessels  and  trains  of  vessels 

2. 
operating solely in estuaries and ports. 

Article  5.07 

Stopping capacity 

Vessels and trains of vessels shall be able to stop facing  downstream  in good  time 

1. 
while remaining adequately  manoeuvrable. 

Where vessels  and  trains  of vessels  are not  longer  than  86 m  and  not wider  than 

2. 
22.90 m the stopping capacity  mentioned  above may be replaced by turning  capacity. 

3. 
The  stopping  capacity  shall be proved  by means  of  stopping  manoeuvres  carried 
out  within  a test  area  as  referred  to  in  Article 5.03  and  the  toning  capacity  by  turning 
manoeuvres  in accordance with  Article 5.10. 

57 

Article 5.08 

Navigability while going astern 

Where the stopping manoeuvre required by Article 5.07 is carried out in stagnant water it 
shall be followed by a navigation test while going astern. 

Article 5.09 

Capacity for  taking evasive action 

Vessels  and trains  of vessels  shall be  able  to  take  evasive  action  in  good  time.  That 
capacity shall be proven by means of evasive manoeuvres  carried out within  a test area 
as referred to in Article 5.03. 

Article 5.10 

Turning capacity 

Vessels and trains of vessels not exceeding 86 m in length or 22.90 m in width shall be 
able to turn in good time. 

That  turning  capacity  may  be  replaced  by  the  stopping  capacity  referred  to  in 
Article 5.07. 

The  turning  capacity  shall  be  proven  by  means  of  turning  manoeuvres  against  the 
current. 

58 

Chapter 6 

STEERING  SYSTEM 

Article  6.01 

General requirements 

Vessels  shall be fitted  with  steering  system  provides  at least the  manoeuvrability 

1. 
required by Chapter 5 of this  annex. 

Powered  steering  system  be  designed  in  such  a  way  that  the  mdder  cannot 

2. 
change position unexpectedly. 

The steering system  as a whole shall be designed  for  permanent lists of up to  15° 

3. 
and ambient temperatures from  -20°C to +50°C. 

4. 
The component parts of the steering system  shall be rugged  enough  always to  be 
able  to withstand  the  stresses  to which  they  may  be  subjected  during  normal  operation. 
No  external  forces  applied  to  the  mdder  shall  impair  the  operating  capacity  of  the 
steering equipment and its controls. 

The steering system shall incorporate a powered  steering control if so required  by 

5. 
the forces  needed to actuate the mdder. 

4  ' 

The  power-actuated  steering  devices  shall  be  protected  against  overloads  by 

6. 
means of a system that restricts the torque applied by the control. 

The  penetrations  for  the  mdder  stocks  shall  be  so  designed  as  to  prevent  the 

7. 
spread of water-polluting  lubricants. 

Article  6.02 

Steering-gear control system 

If  the  steering  system  is  power  actuated,  it  must  be  possible  to  bring  a  second 
1. 
control  system,  or  manual  control,  into  use  within  five  seconds  if  the  steering-control 
system fails  or  malfunctions. 

If  the  second  control  system  or  manual  control  is  not  placed  in  service 
2. 
automatically  it must be possible to do so immediately  by means of a single operation by 
the helmsman that is both simple and quick. 

The  second  control  system  or  manual  control  shall  enable  the  manoeuvrability 

3. 
required by Chapter 5 of this regulation to be ensured. 

Article  6.03 

Steering-system hydraulic drive 

No  consumer  device  may  be  connected  to the  hydraulic  actuating  system  for  the 
1. 
steering system.  Where there are two  independent  steering controls such a connection  to 
one  of  the  two  systems  is  however  acceptable  if  the  consumers  are  connected  to  the 
return  line  and  may  be  disconnected  from  the  steering  control  by  means  of  an  isolating 
device. 

59 

2. 
Where there  are two hydraulic systems  a separate hydraulic  reservoir  is  needed 
for  each  of  the  two  systems.  However,  double  reservoirs  are  acceptable.  Hydraulic 
reservoirs  shall  be fitted  with  a warning  system  that monitors  any  drop  in the oil  level 
below the lowest content level needed for reliable operation. 

The manoeuvring  system  does  not have to be  duplicated  if  this  can  be  actuated 

3. 
manually or by manually-controlled hydraulic actuation from the wheelhouse. 

The dimensions,  design and arrangement of the pipework  shall  as far as possible 

4. 
exclude damage to them as a result of mechanical factors or fire. 

5. 
As  far  as  hydraulically-actuated  systems  are  concerned  no  separate  pipework 
system  is  required  for  the  second  steering  system  actuation  system  if  independent 
operation of the two control systems is guaranteed and if the pipework system  is  able to 
withstand a pressure at least  1.5 times that of the maximum service pressure. 

Flexible  piping  is  only  permitted  where  its  use  is  essential  in  order  to  damp 
6. 
vibrations  or to  allow freedom  of movement of  components.  It shall  be  designed  for  a 
pressure that is at least equal to the maximum service pressure. 

Article  6.04 
Power  source 

Steering systems fitted with two powered actuators shall have at least two  power 

1. 
sources. 

If  the  second  power  source  for  the  power-actuated  steering  system  is  not 
2. 
constantly  available  while  the vessel  is  under way  the  buffer  device  carrying  adequate 
capacity shall provide back up during the period needed for start up. 

In the case of  electrical  power  sources  no  other  consumer unit may  be  supplied 

3. 
by the main power supply for the steering system. 

Article  6.05 

Manual  actuation 

1. 

The hand-operated wheel shall not be driven by the power-actuation system. 

Regardless of mdder position hand wheel kick-back must be prevented when that 

2. 
manually-operated wheel is engaged automatically. 

Article  6.06 

Rudder-propeller,  water-jet,  cycloidal-propeller, 
and bow-thruster systems 

1. 
Where  the thrust vectoring  of  rudder-propeller,  water-jet,  cycloidal-propeller  or 
bow-thruster  systems  is  remotely  actuated  by  electric,  hydraulic  or  pneumatic  power, 
there  must  be  two  actuation  systems,  each  independent  of  the  other,  between  the 
wheelhouse and the system which, by analogy,  meet the requirements of Articles 6.01  to 
6.06. 

60 

Such systems are not subject to this section if they are not needed  in order to achieve the 
manoeuvrability  required  by  Chapter 5 of  this  regulation  or  if they  are  only  needed  for 
the stopping test. 

2. 
Where  there  are  several  rudder-propeller,  water-jet,  cycloidal-propeller  or 
bow-thruster  systems  that  are  independent  of  each  other  the  second  actuation  system  is 
not  necessary  if  the  vessel  retains  the  manoeuvrability  required  by  Chapter 5  of  this 
regulation if one of the systems fails. 

Article  6.07 

Readouts and monitoring 

The  mdder  position  must  be  clearly  displayed  at  the  steering  position. 

1. 
rudder-position readout is electric it must have its own power supply. 

If  the 

There  must  be  at  least  the  following  readouts  and  monitoring  devices  at  the 

2. 
steering position: 

a)  oil  level  in  the  hydraulic  reservoirs  in  accordance  with  Article 6.03,  section  2,  and 

service pressure of the hydraulic system; 

b)  failure of the electricity supply for the actuation  system; 
c)  failure of the electricity supply for the drive system; 
d) failure  of the rate-of-turn  regulator; 
e)  failure  of the required buffer  devices. 

' " 

Article  6.08 

Rate-of-turn regulators 

The rate-of-turn  regulators  and their components  shall meet the requirements  laid 

1. 
down in Article 9.20. 

The  proper  functioning  of  the  rate-of-turn  regulator  must  be  displayed  at  the 

2. 
steering position by means of a green warning  light. 

Any  lack of  or unacceptable  variations  in the  supply  voltage  and  an unacceptable  fall  in 
the speed of rotation of the gyroscope must be monitored. 

3. 
Where,  in  addition  to  the  rate-of-turn  regulator,  there  are other  steering  systems, 
it must  be  possible  clearly  to  distinguish  at the  steering  position which  of  these  systems 
has been activated.  It must be possible to shift  from  one  system to another  immediately. 
The rate-of-turn  regulator must not cause any kick-back  in the steering systems. 

The electricity supply to the rate-of-turn  regulator must be independent of that  for 

4. 
the other power consumers. 

5. 
The  gyroscopes,  detectors  and  turn  displays  used  in  the  rate-of-turn  regulators 
must meet the minimum  requirements  of the minimum  Specifications  and test  conditions 
waterways. 
concerning 

rate-of-turn 

displays 

inland 

for 

61 

Article 6.09 

Acceptance 

The compliance of the installed steering system must be checked by an inspection 

1. 
body.  It may, for this purpose, request the following documents: 

a)  description of the steering system; 
b) drawings  and  information  on  the  steering  system  actuation  systems  and  of  the 

operating controls; 

c)  information  concerning the steering system; 
d) electrical wiring diagram; 
e)  description of the rate-of-turn regulator; 
f)  system-use instructions. 

Operation of the entire steering system must be checked by means of a navigation 
2. 
test.  It must be checked that a predetermined  course can be reliably maintained  by the 
rate-of-turn regulators and that bends can be negotiated safely. 

62 

Chapter 7 

WHEELHOUSE 

Article  7.01 

General 

Wheelhouses  shall be  arranged  in such  a way that the helmsman  may  at all  times 

1. 
perform  his task while the vessel is under way. 

Under  normal  operating  conditions  sound  pressure  generated  by  the vessel  itself 

2. 
and perceived by the helmsman at the steering position shall not exceed  70 dB(A). 

Where  a wheelhouse has been  configured  for  radar navigation  by  a single  person 
3. 
the helmsman  shall be  able to  accomplish  his task while  seated  and  all  of the  display  or 
monitoring  instmments  and all of the controls needed for  operation of the vessel  shall be 
arranged  in such a way that the helmsman may use them  comfortably  while the vessel is 
under way without leaving his position or losing sight of the radar screen. 

Article  7.02 

Unobstructed view 

There must be an adequately unobstructed  view in all directions from  the steering 

1. 
position. 

The area of obstructed  vision for the helmsman  ahead  of the vessel  in an unladen 

2. 
state with half of its supplies but without ballast shall not exceed 250 m. 

The optical means of reducing the area of restricted  vision may not be taken into  account 
during the inspection. 

The helmsman's  field  of vision  at his normal position  shall be  at least 240°  from 
3. 
the  horizon  and  at  least  140°  within  the  semicircle  pointing  towards  the  front  of  the 
vessel. 

No  column,  post  or  superstmcture  shall  lie  within  the  normal  line  of  sight  of  the 
helmsman. 

If  no  sufficiently  unobstructed  view  is  provided  towards  the  rear  the  inspection  body 
may  require  other  forms  of  action  and  in  particular  the  installation  of  auxiliary  optical 
devices. 

There  must  in  all weathers  be  suitable  means  of  providing  a  clear  view  through 

4. 
the windscreen. 

The  glazing  used  in  wheelhouses  shall  display  a  light  transmission  of  at  least 

5. 
75%. 

63 

Article  7.03 

General requirements concerning control,  display and 
monitoring equipment 

It  must  be  possible  easily  to  place  in  their  position  of  use  those  controls  that  are 

1. 
needed to operate the vessel.  That position must be unambiguously  clear. 

2. 
The  monitoring  instruments  must  be  easily  legible.  It must  be  possible  to  adjust 
their lighting steplessly down to their extinction.  Light sources shall be neither  intrusive 
nor impair the legibility of the monitoring  instruments. 

3. 

There must be a system for testing the warning lights. 

It  must  be  possible  clearly  to  establish  whether  a  system  is  in  operation. 

4. 
functioning  is indicated by means of a warning light this shall be green. 

If  its 

5.  Any malfunctioning  or failure of systems that require monitoring shall be indicated 
by means of red warning lights. 

6.  An  audible warning  shall  sound  at the  same time that the red warning  lights  light 
up.  The audible warnings  may  consist of  a single,  common  signal.  The sound  pressure 
level of that signal shall  exceed the maximum  sound pressure  level  of  the  ambient  noise 
at the steering position by at least 3 dB(A). 

The  audible warning  system  may  be  switched  off  after  the malfunction  or  failure 
7. 
has  been  confirmed. 
That  shutdown  shall  not  prevent  the  alarm  signal  from  being 
triggered  by  other  malfunctions.  The  red  warning  lights  shall  only  go  out  when  the 
malfunction  has been  corrected. 

The  monitoring  and  display  devices  shall  be  automatically  connected  to  an 

8. 
alternative power supply if their own power supply fails. 

Article  7.04 

Equipment for  controlling,  displaying and monitoring the 
operation of the power plants  and steering system 

1. 
It  must  be  possible  to  control  and  monitor  the  power  plants  and  steering  systems 
from  the steering position.  Power plants fitted  with a clutch which may be actuated  from 
the steering position, or which  drive a mdder propeller whichmay be controlled from  the 
steering position,  may only be started up and shut down from  inside the engine room. 

The  control  for  each  drive  engine  shall  take  the  form  of  a  single  lever  which 
2. 
prescribes  an  arc  within  a  vertical  plane  that  is  perceptibly  parallel  to  the  longitudinal 
axis  of  the  vessel.  Movement  of  that  lever  towards  the  bow  of  the  vessel  shall  cause 
forward  motion,  whereas  movement of the lever  towards the stem  shall  cause the  vessel 
to  go  astern.  Clutch  engagement  and  reversal  of  the  direction  of travel  shall  take  place 
about the neutral  position  of that lever.  A clearly audible click shall indicate that  neutral 
position.  The  lever  travel  between  neutral  and  the  "full  speed  ahead"  position  and 
between neutral  and the "full  astern" position shall not exceed 90°. 

3. 
The  direction  of  the  power-plant  thmst  imparted  to  the  vessel  and  the  rotational 
speed  of  the  propeller  or  drive  engines  must  be  displayed  inside wheelhouses  that  have 
been  designed  for  radar  navigation  by  one  person. 

64 

The  displays  and  control  devices  required  by  Article 6.07,  section 2,  Article 8.03, 

4. 
section 2, and Article 8.05, section  11, shall be located  at this steering position. 

The  steering  system  for  the  vessel  shall  be  controlled  by  means  of  a  lever  in 
5. 
wheelhouses  that  have  been  designed  for  radar  navigation  by  one  person. 
It  must  be 
possible  to  move  that  lever  easily  by  hand.  The  angular  displacement  of  the  lever  in 
relation  to  the  axis  of  the  vessel  shall  correspond  precisely  to  the  displacement  of  the 
mdder blades.  It must be possible to leave the lever in any given position without that of 
the  mdder  blades  changing.  A  clearly  perceptible  click  must  indicate  the  neutral 
position. 

6.  Where,  in  wheelhouses  arranged  for  radar  navigation  by  one  person  the  vessel  is 
fitted  with  bow  rudders  or  special  rudders,  particularly  for  going  astern,  these  shall  be 
actuated  by special levers which,  by analogy,  meet the requirements  set out  in  section 5. 
That  requirement  shall  also  apply  where,  in  trains  of  craft,  the  steering  system  fitted  to 
craft  other than those powering the train is used. 

7.  Where  rate  of  turn  regulators  are  used  it  must  be  possible  for  the  rate  of  turn 
control to be released in any given position without altering the speed  selected. 
The  control  must  turn  through  a  wide  enough  arc  to  guarantee  adequately  precise 
positioning.  The neutral  position  must be  clearly  distinguished  from  the  other  position. 
It must be possible to set the scale illumination  so as to be infinitely  variable. 

The remote-control  equipment  for  all  of  the  steering  system  must be  installed  in a 
8. 
permanent  manner  and  be  arranged  in  such  a  way  that  the  course  selected  is  clearly 
visible.  If the remote  control  equipment  can  be  disengaged  it must  be  equipped  with  a 
read-out  displaying  the  situation  "in  service"  or  "not  in  service".  The  disposition  and 
manipulation of the controls must be  functional. 
Impermanent  remote-control  equipment  for  systems  that  are  subsidiary  to  the  steering 
system,  such as  active bow  thruster,  shall  be  acceptable  provided  that  such  a  subsidiary 
installation can be activated by means of an override at any time within the wheelhouse. 

In  the  case  of  propeller-rudder,  water-jet,  cycloidal-propeller  and  bow-rudder  systems, 
equivalent devices shall be acceptable as control, display  and monitoring devices 
The requirements  set out  in sections  1-8  shall  apply,  by  analogy,  in view  of  the  specific 
characteristics  and  arrangements  selected  for  the  steering  and  drive  controls  referred  to 
above.  The direction of the thmst  acting on the vessel or the direction  of the jet  must be 
clearly indicated  for  each installation,  account being taken of its position. 

Article  7.05 

Control and monitoring  of signal  lights, light signals and 
sound  signals 

1. 

In this Article the term 

(a)  "signal  lights" means  the  mast,  side  and  stem  lights,  and  the  lights  visible  from 
all  sides,  the  blue  flashing  lights  and  the  blue  lights  for  the  carriage  of  dangerous 
substances; 

(b)  "light  signals"  means  the  lights  accompanying  the  audible  signals  and  the  light 
assigned to the blue panel. 

65 

2.  Warning  lights or any other equivalent device for monitoring the signal lights  shall 
be  installed  in  the wheelhouse unless  that  monitoring  can be performed  direct  from  the 
wheelhouse. 

3. 
In  wheelhouses  designed  for  radar  navigation  one  person  warning  lights  must  be 
installed  on  the  control  panel  in  order  to  monitor  the  signal  lights  and  the  light  signals. 
Signal-light switches must be included in the warning lights or be adjacent  to these. 

The  layout  and  colour  of the  warning  lights  for  the  signal  lights  and  light  signals  must 
correspond  to the actual position  and colour  of those lights  and signals.  The failure  of a 
signal  light  or  light  signal to function  must  cause the  corresponding  warning  light  to  go 
out or to be signalled  in another manner by the corresponding warning light. 

4. 
The  audible warning  devices  shall be foot  actuated  in wheelhouses  that  have  been 
designed  for radar navigation by one person.  That requirement  shall not apply to the "do 
not approach" signal in line with the police instructions  in force in the Member  States. 

Article  7.06 

Radar  installations and rate-of-turn  indicators 

1. 
The  radar  equipment  and  rate  of  turn  indicators  must  be  of  a  type  that  has  been 
approved  by  the  competent  authorities.  The  requirements  concerning  installation  and 
operational monitoring must be met. 

The rate of turn indicator must be located  ahead  pf the helmsman  and within  his field  of 
vision. 

2. 

In wheelhouses  designed for radar navigation by one person: 

a)  the  radar  screen  shall  not  be  significantly  to  one  side  of  the  line  of  sight  of  the 

helmsman in its normal position; 

b)  the  radar  image  shall  continue  to  be  perfectly  visible,  without  a  mask  or  screen, 

whatever the lighting conditions applying outside the wheelhouse; 

c)  the rate of turn indicator  shall be installed  directly  above or below the radar  image or 

be incorporated  into this. 

Article  7.07 

Radio  telephony systems for  vessels with 
wheelhouses designed for  radar navigation by 
one person 

1.  Where vessel  wheelhouses  have been  designed  for  radar  navigation  by  one  person 
reception  from  the vessel-vessel  networks  and that of nautical  information  shall  be via  a 
loudspeaker,  and  outgoing  communications  via  a fixed  microphone.  Send/receive  shall 
be selected  by means of a push-button. 

It  shall  not  be  possible  to  use  the  microphones  in  those  networks  for  the  public 
correspondence  network. 

66 

2. 
It must be possible for reception to take place from  the helmsman's  seat on vessels 
whose wheelhouse has been designed  for radar navigation by one person  and which have 
been equipped with a radio telephone system for the public telephone  network. 

Article  7.08 

Sound links on board 

There  must  be  a  sound  link  for  internal  communications  on  board  vessels  whose 
wheelhouse has been designed for radar navigation by one person. 

It must be possible to establish sound  links from  the steering position:  -

a)  with the front  of the vessel or train of vessels; 

b)  with  the  rear  of  the vessel  or  train  of  vessels  if  no  other  communication  is  possible 

from  the steering position; 

c)  with the crew  accommodation; 

d) with the skipper's  cabin. 

Reception  at all of these sound-link positions  shall be via high  speaker,  and  transmission 
shall be via a fixed  microphone.  The link with the front  and rear of the vessel  or train  of 
vessels may be of the radio-telephone type. 

Article  7.09 

Alarm  system 

There  must  be  an  independent  alarm  system  enabling  the  accommodation,  engine 

1. 
rooms and, where appropriate, the separate pump rooms to be reached. 

2. 
The  helmsman  must  have  within  reach  an  on/off  switch  controlling  the  alarm 
signal;  switches  which  automatically  return  to  the  off  position  when  released  are  not 
acceptable. 

The  sound  pressure level  for  the  alarm  signal  shall  be  at  least  75 dB(A)  within  the 

3. 
accommodation  area. 

In the  engine  rooms  and  pump  rooms  the  alarm  signal  shall  take  the  form  of  a  flashing 
light that is visible on all sides and clearly perceptible at all points. 

67 

Article  7.10 

Heating  and  ventilation 

Wheelhouses  shall  be  equipped  with  a  heating  and  ventilation  system  that  can  be 
regulated. 

Article  7.11 

Stern-anchor  operating equipment 

It must be possible for  the helmsman  to drop the stem  anchor from  his position  on board 
vessels  and  trains  of  vessels  whose  wheelhouse  has  been  designed  for  radar  navigation 
by one person  and whose length exceeds  86 m and whose width exceeds 22.90 m. 

Article  7.12 

Retractable  wheelhouses 

It  must  be  possible  for  variable-height  wheelhouses  to  be  fitted  with  an  emergency 
lowering system. 

All  lowering  operations  shall  automatically  trigger  a  clearly  audible  warning  signal. 
That requirement  shall not apply if the risk  of  corporal  injury  which  may  result from  the 
lowering is prevented  by appropriate  design  features. 

It must be possible safely  to leave the wheelhouse whatever its position. 

Article  7.13 

Entry  in the inspection certificate that 
vessels have special  wheelhouse arrangements for 
radar navigation  by one person 

Where  a  vessel  complies  with  Article 7.01,  7.04-7.08,  and  7.11 
in  respect  of 
wheelhouses  that  have  been  designed  for  radar  navigation  by  one person,  the  following 
statement shall be entered  in the  certificate: 

"The vessel has special wheelhouse  arrangements for  steering on radar by one person". 

68 

Chapter 8 

ENGINE DESIGN 

Article  8.01 

General 

Engines  and  their  ancillaries  shall  be  designed,  built  and  installed  in  accordance 

1. 
with the state of the art. 

2. 
Installations requiring  close inspection such  as steam boilers, other pressure vessels 
and their accessories, together with lifts,  shall meet the regulations  applying  in one of the 
Member  States of the Community. 

Only  internal-combustion  engines  burning  fuels  having  a flashpoint  of  more  than 

3. 
55°C may be installed. 

Article  8.02 

Safety  equipment 

1. 
Engines  shall  be  installed  and  fitted  in  such  a way  as  to  be  adequately  accessible 
for operation  and maintenance  and shall not endanger the persons assigned to those tasks. 
It must be possible to make them secure against inadvertent starting. 

Power  plants,  ancillaries,  boilers  and  pressure  vessels,  together  with 

2. 
accessories, must be fitted with safety  devices. 

their 

3. 
It  must  be  possible,  where  so  needed,  also  to  shut  down  the  motors  driving  the 
blower  and  suction  fans  from  outside  the premises  in which  they  are  located,  and  from 
outside the engine room. 

Article  8.03 

Power  plant 

1. 

It shall be possible to start, stop or reverse the power plant safety  and  quickly. 

2. 

The following  shall be monitored by suitable devices which trigger  an alarm  once 
a critical level has been reached: 

(a) 

the temperature of the main-engine  cooling water; 

(b) 

the lubricating-oil pressure for the main engines and transmissions; 

(c) 

the  oil  and  air  pressure  of  the  main  engine  reversing  units,  reversible 
transmissions or propellers. 

3.  Where  vessels  have  only  one  drive  engine  that  engine  shall  not  be  shut  down 
automatically  except in order to protect against  over-rewing. 

Shaft  bushings  shall  be  designed  in  such  a  way  as  to  prevent  the  spread  of 

4. 
water-polluting  lubricants. 

69 

Article  8.04 

Engine exhaust system 

1. 

The exhaust gases shall be ducted out of the vessel in their entirety. 

2.  All  suitable  steps  shall  be  taken  to  avoid  ingress  of  the  exhaust  gases  into  the 
various  compartments. 
the 
wheelhouse  shall,  within  these,  be  covered  by  protective  gas-tight  sheathing.  The  gap 
between the exhaust pipe and this sheathing shall be open to the outside air. 

through  accommodation  or 

Exhaust  pipes  passing 

The  exhaust  pipes  shall  be  arranged  and  protected  in  such  a way  that they  cannot 

3. 
cause a fire. 

The  exhaust  pipes  shall  be  suitably  insulated  or  cooled  in  the  engine  rooms. 

4. 
Protection against physical  contact may suffice  outside the engine rooms. 

Article  8.05 

Fuel  tanks, pipes  and  accessories 

1. 
Liquid  fuels  shall  be  stored  in  steel  tanks  or,  if  so  required  by  the  design  of  the 
vessel, in an equivalent material  in terms of fireproofmg,  this forming  part of the hull  or 
being firmly  attached to this.  That requirement shall not apply to tanks having a capacity 
of  no  more  than  12 litres  that  have  been  incorporated  in  ancillaries  at  the  factory.  Fuel 
tanks shall not have common surfaces with drinking-water tanks. 

2. 
Tanks  and  their  pipework  and  other  accessories  shall  be  laid  out  and  arranged  in 
such  a  way  that  neither  fuel  nor  gas  may  accidentally  reach  the  inside  of  the  vessel. 
Tank valves intended for fuel  sampling or water drainage shall close automatically. 

3.  No fuel  tanks may be located  ahead of the transverse watertight bulkhead. 

4.  Daily-supply  tanks  and  their  fittings  shall  not be  located  above  engines  or  exhaust 
pipes. 

5. 

The filler  orifices  for fuel  tanks shall be marked  distinctly. 

6. 
The orifice  for  the liquid-fuel  tank filler  necks shall be on the  deck,  except  for  the 
daily-supply  tanks.  The filler  neck  shall be fitted  with  a cap.  Such tanks  shall be  fitted 
with  a breather  pipe  terminating  in  the  open  air  above  the  deck  and  arranged  in  such  a 
way that no water  ingress is possible. 

Its section shall be at least  1.25  times the cross section of the filler  neck. 

7.  At  tank outlets the pipework  for the distribution  of liquid  fuels  shall be fitted  with 
a shutoff  device that can be operated from  the deck. 
That requirement  shall not apply to tanks mounted  directly on the engine. 

70 

8. 
Fuel pipes, their  connections,  seals  and  fittings  shall  be made of materials  that  are 
able to withstand  the mechanical,  chemical  and thermal  stresses  to which  they  are  likely 
to  be  subjected.  The  fuel  pipes  shall  not  be  subjected  to  any  damaging  effects  of  heat 
and it must be possible to monitor them throughout their length. 

9. 
Fuel tanks shall be provided with a capacity-gauging  device that is legible right  up 
to the maximum  filling  level.  The  checking  tubes  shall  be  effectively  protected  against 
impacts, shall be fitted  with  automatically  closing taps at their base and shall be attached 
at their upper part to the tanks above their maximum  filling  level.  The material used  for 
the checking tubes shall not deform  under normal ambient temperatures. 

10.  Liquid-fuel  tanks  shall  be  provided  with  openings  having  leak-proof  closures  that 
are intended to permit cleaning and  inspection. 

11.  Fuel  tanks  directly  supplying  the  pov/er  plants  and  the  engines  needed  for 
navigation purposes  shall be fitted  with a device emitting both visual  and  audible  signals 
in the  engine  room  if  their  level  of  filling  is  not  sufficient  to  ensure  continued  reliable 
operation. 

Article  8.06 

Bilge pumping  and drainage  systems 

It  shall  be  possible  to  pump  each  sealed  compartment  dry  separately.  However, 
1. 
that  requirement  shall  not  apply  to  compartments  that  are  normally  sealed  hermetically 
during operation. 

2.  Vessels  requiring  a  crew  shall  be  equipped  with  two  separate  bilge  pumps  which 
shall not be installed within the same space.  At least one of these shall be motor  driven. 
However,  if  the  power  units  for  such  vessels  develop  less  than  225 kW  or  weigh  less 
than  3501 gross  respectively,  or  where  vessels  not  intended  for  the  carriage  of  goods 
have  a  displacement  of  less  than  250 m3,  either  a  manually-operated  or  motor-driven 
pump wili  suffice. 
Each of the required  pumps shall be capable of use on each sealed  compartment. 

3. 

The  pumping  capacity  of  the  first  bilge  pump  shall  be  calculated  via  the  formula: 

Q ^ O . l - d j2 

[1/min] 

dL is calculated via the  formula 

d! =  1.5VL(B + H) + 25  [mm]. 

The  pumping  capacity  of  the  second  bilge  pump  shall  be  calculated,  in  1/min  via  the 
following  formula: 

Q2 = 0.1«d2

2 

[1/min] 

d2 is calculated by the  formula: 

d2=  2 Vl  (B + H) + 25  [mm]. 
However, the value d2 may be taken no to exceed value d^  The  length  of  the 
sealed  compartment shall be taken to be 1 in order to determine Q2. 

longest 

71 

In these  formulae: 

the length of the corresponding sealed  compartment,  in m; 

1  = 
dj  =  the calculated intemal diameter of the drainage pipe, in mm; 
d2 =  the calculated  internal diameter of the drainage spur, in mm. 

4.  Where  the  drainage pumps  are  connected  to  a drainage  system  the  drainage  pipes 
shall have  an  internal  diameter  of  at least  db  in mm,  and  the  drainage  spurs  an  internal 
diameter of at least d2, in mm. 

Where vessels are less than 25 m in length these values may be reduced to 35 mm. 

5. 

Only self-priming  drainage pumps are acceptable. 

There  must  be  at  least  one  strainer  on  both  the  starboard  and  port  sides  of  all 

6. 
flat-bottomed,  drainable compartments that are wider than 5 m. 

It may be possible to drain the rear beak via the main  engine room by means of  an 

7. 
easily accessible, automatically  closable set of pipes. 

The drainage  spurs for  the various  compartments  shall be  linked  to  the main  drain 

8. 
by means of a lockable non-return valve. 

The  compartments  or  other  spaces  fitted  out  for  ballast  may  only  be  linked  to  the 
drainage system by means of a single closing device.  That requirement shall not apply to 
holds  fitted  out  for  ballast.  Such  holds  shall  be  filled  with  ballast  water  by  means  of 
ballast  piping  that  is permanently  installed  and  independent  of the  drainage  pipes, or  by 
means of spurs consisting of flexible pipes or intermediate pipes that can be connected  to 
the main drain.  Water intake valves located  in the base of the hold  shall not be permitted 
for this purpose. 

9. 

The hold bottoms shall be fitted  with depth gauges. 

10.  Where  a  drainage  system 
the 
bilge-bottom  drainage  pipes  intended  to  extract  oily  water  shall  be  equipped  with 
closures  that  have  been  sealed  in  position  by  an  inspection  body.  The  number  and 
position of those closures shall be entered on the  certificate. 

incorporates  permanently 

fixed  pipework 

Article  8.07 

Oily-water and drained-oil  stores 

It  shall  be  possible  to  store  water  made  oily  by  operation  on  board.  The 

1. 
engine-room  hold bottom  is considered to be a store for this purpose. 

2. 
In  order  to  store  spent  oils  there  shall,  in  the  engine  room,  be  one  or  several 
specific  recipients  whose  capacity  corresponds  to  at  least  1.5  times  the  quantity  of  the 
waste  oils  from  the  sumps  of  all  of  the  internal  combustion  engines  and  all  of  the 
equipment 
the  hydraulic-fluid 
reservoirs. 

installed,  together  with  the  hydraulic  fluids  from 

72 

The  connections  used  in  order  to  empty  the recipients  referred  to  above  shall  comply 
with European standard EN 1305. 

3.  Where  vessels  are  only  used  on  short-haul  work  the  inspection  body  may  grant 
exemptions from the requirements of section 2. 

Article 8.08 

Noise emitted by vessels 

The noise produced by a vessel under way, and in particular the- engine induction 

1. 
and exhaust noises, shall be damped by using appropriate means. 

The noise  generated  by  a vessel  shall  not  exceed  75 dB(A)  at  lateral  distance  of 

2. 
25 m from the outer hull. 

3.  Apart from transhipment operations the noise generated by a stationary vessel shall 
not exceed 65 dB(A) at a lateral distance of 25 m. 

73 

Chapter 9 

ELECTRICAL  EQUIPMENT 

Article 9.01 

General 

1.  Where there are no specific  requirements  concerning  certain parts of an installation 
the safety  level  shall be  considered  satisfactory  where those parts have been produced  in 
accordance with  an approved  European  standard  or in^ accordance with  the  requirements 
of an approved  classification  society. 
The relevant documents shall be submitted to the inspection body. 

2.  Documents  containing  the  following,  and  duly  stamped  by  the  inspection  body, 
shall be kept on board: 

a)  general drawings concerning  all of the electrical  equipment; 

b)  switching  diagrams  for  the  main  control  panel,  the  emergency-installation  panel  and 
the  distribution  panels,  together  with  the  most  important  technical  data  such  as  the 
amperage and rated current of the protection  and control devices; 

c)  power data concerning the electrical service  equipment; 

d) types of cable and statement of conductor cross sections. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  keep  such  documents  on  board  uncrewed  craft,  but  they  must  be 
available at all times from  the owner. 

The  equipment  shall  be  designed  for  permanent  lists  of  up  to  15°  and  ambient 
3. 
inside temperatures of between 0 and +40°C, and on the deck between -20°C and +40°C. 
It shall function  perfectly  at those limits. 

The electrical and electronic equipment and appliances shall be fully  accessible and 

4. 
easy to maintain. 

Article  9.02 

Electricity  supply  systems 

1.  Where  craft  are fitted  with  an  electrical  system  that  system  shall  in  principle  have  at 
least two power  sources  in  such  a way  that where  one  power  source  fails  the  remaining 
source  is  able  to  supply  the  equipment  needed  for  navigational  safety  for  at  least 
30 minutes. 

2.  Adequate  sizing  of  the  power  supply  shall  be  demonstrated  by  means  of  a  power 
budget.  An appropriate simultaneity factor  may be taken  into account. 

3.  Independently  of  Section  1 above,  Article 6.04  shall  apply  to  the  power  supplies  for 
the steering system  (mdder  installations). 

4.  The  power  supplies  referred  to  in  Section  1  shall  be  independent  of  each  other  on 
board passenger vessels. 

74 

5.  Article  9.18  shall  apply to  emergency  power  supplies  on board  day-excursion  vessels 
whose length LF is not less than 25 m, and on vessels with cabins. 

Article  9.03 

Protection  against physical  contact, the insertion of solid  objects 
and the infiltration of water 

The type of minimum  protection  for parts of permanent fixtures  shall be as set out in the 
table. 

Location 

Generators 

Motors 

Transformers 

Panels 
Distributors 
Switches 

Installation 
equipment 

Lighting 
devices 

Type of minimum protection 

in accordance with IEC publ. 529) 

Service 
rooms, 
compartments 

premises, 

engine 
steering-gear 

Holds 

Battery and paint lockers 

Unroofed  decks  and  steering 
positions 

2) 

1)2) 

IP 22 

IP 22 

IP 22 

IP 22 

IP 44 

IP 55 

IP 22 

IP 55 

IP 44 

u. (EX)3) 

IP 55 

IP 55 

IP 55 

IP 55 

Enclosed  wheelhouse 

IP 22 

IP 22 

Accommodation  apart 
health 
facilities 
rooms 

from 
and  wash 

IP 22 

IP 22 

IP 22 

IP 20 

IP 22 

IP 20 

facilities 

and  wash 

IP 44 

IP 44 

IP 44 

IP 55 

IP 44 

Health 
rooms 

Remarks 

1 

Where appliances release large amounts of heat: IP 12 

Where appliances or panels do not have this type of protection their location shall meet the conditions applying to that 
type of protection.. 

Electrical equipment of the certified  safety type as in accordance with the European standards EN 50014-50020 or in 
accordance with IEC Publication 79. 

Article  9.04 

Explosion  proofing 

Only  electrical  equipment  that  has  been  explosion  proofed,  (safety-certified)  may  be 
installed  in premises  where potentially  explosive gases  or mixtures of gases  are likely  to 
accumulate,  such  as  compartments  set  aside  for  accumulators  or  the  storage  of  highly 
inflammable  products.  No  light  switches  or other  electrical  appliances  shall  be  installed 
on those premises.  The explosion proofing  shall take account of the characteristics  of the 
to  arise 
potentially  explosive  gases  or  mixtures  of  gases 
(explosion-potential  group, temperature class). 

that  are 

likely 

75 

Article 9.05 

Earthing 

1.  Systems under a voltage of more than 50 V need to be earthed. 

2.  Metal parts that are open to physical contact and which, during normal operation, are 
not  electrically  live,  such  as  engine  frames  and  casings,  appliances  and  lighting 
equipment, shall be earthed separately where these are not in electrical  contact with the 
hull as a result of their installation. 

3.  The  housings  of  electrical  receivers  of  the  mobile  and  portable  type  shall,  during 
normal use, be earthed by means of an additional neutral  conductor that is  incorporated 
into the power cable. 

That prescription  does not  apply where  a circuit-separation  transformer  is used,  nor to 
appliances fitted with protective insulation (double insulation). 

4.  The cross  section  of  the earthing  conductors  shall  be not  less than  as set out  in the 
table: 

Cross section of outside 
conductors 

(mm ) 

Minimum cross section of earthing conductors 

in insulated cables 

(mm ) 

from 0.5 to 4 

same cross section as that of 
the outside conductor 

fitted  separately 
(mm2) 

4 

more than 4 to 16 

same cross section as that of  same cross section as that of 

more than  16 to 35 

more than 3 5 to 120 

more than 120 

the outside conductor 

the outside conductor 

16 

16 

half of the cross section of 
the outside conductor 
70 

| 

half of the cross section of 
the outside conductor 
70 

76 

Article  9.06 

Maximum permissible  voltages 

1.  The following  voltages shall not be exceeded: 

Type of  installation 

Maximum permissible  voltage 

Direct 
current 

Single-phase 
alternating 
current 

Three-phase 
alternating 
current 

a. 

b. 

c. 

d. 

Power  and  heating  installations  including  the  relevant 
sockets 

250 V 

250 V 

500 V 

Lighting,  communications,  command  and  information 
installations  including the relevant  sockets 

250V 

250V 

-

Sockets  intended  to  supply  portable  devices  used  on 
open  decks  or  within  narrow  or  damp  metal  lockers, 
apart  from  boilers and tanks: 

1.  In general... 
2.  Where a circuit-separation  transformer  only  supplies 
one appliance  ... 
3.  Where  protective-insulation  (double 
appliances are used  ... 
4.  Where  <30  mA  default  current  circuit  breakers  are 
used. 

insulation) 

50VU 

250V 

50VU 

250V2) 

250V 

250V 

500V 

Mobile  components  such  as  electrical  equipment  for 
containers,  motors,  blowers  and  mobile  pumps  which 
are  not  normally  handled  during  service  and  use 
conducting  parts which are open  to physical  contact  are 
earthed  by  means  of  a  protective  conductor  that  is 
incorporated  into  the  connecting  cable  and  which,  in 
addition  to  that  effective  conductor,  are  connected  to 
the hull by their location or another conductor  ... 

250V 

250V 

500V 

e. 

Sockets  intended  to  supply  portable  appliances  used 
inside boilers and  tanks 

50Vn 

50V° 

Comments: 

1)  Where  that  voltage  comes  from  higher-voltage  networks  galvanic  separation  must  be  used  (safety 
transformer). 
2)  All of  the poles of the secondary  circuit  shall be  insulated  from  the earth. 

2.  If the required  protective measures are applied  higher voltages are acceptable: 

(a) 

for  power  installations where their power so requires; 

(b) 

for  special  on-board  installations  such  as radio and  ignition systems 

1  > 

Article 9.07 

Distribution systems 

1. The following  distribution systems are allowed for  direct and single-phase  alternating 
current: 

(a) two-conductor systems of which one is earthed (Ll/N/PE); 

(b) single-conductor  systems using the hull-return principle,  only for  local  installations 
(for example, starting gear for combustion engines, cathodic protection) (LI/PEN); 

(c) two-conductor systems that are insulated from the hull (L1/L2/PE). 

2. The following distribution systems are allowed for three-phase alternating current: 

(a) four-conductor  systems with earthing of the neutral  point,  not using the hull  return 
principle (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) = network tTN-S) or network tlT); 

(b) three-conductor systems insulated from the hull tLl/L2/L3/PEN); 

(c)  three-conductor  systems  with  earthing  of  the  neutral  point  using  the  hull  return 
principle except for terminal circuits tLl/L2/L3/PEN). 

3. The inspection body may allow the use of other systems. 

Article 9.08 

Connection to the shore or other external networks 

1.  Incoming  supply  lines  from  landbased  networks  or  other  external  networks  to  the 
installations of the onboard network shall have a permanent  connection on board  in the 
form  of  fixed  terminals  or  fixed  plug  sockets.  The  cable  connections  shall  not  be 
subjected to any pulling toad. 

2.  The  hull  shall  be  capable  of  being  earthed  effectively  when  the  connection  voltage 
exceeds 50 V. The earthing connection shall be specially marked. 

3  The  switching  devices  for  the  connection  shall  be  capable  of  being  locked  so  as to 
prevent  the  concurrent  operation  of  the  onboard  network  generators  and  the  shore 
network  or  another  external  network.  A brief  period  of  concurrent  operation  shall  be 
permitted when changing from  one system to another without a break in voltage. 

4. The connection shall be protected against short circuits and overloads. 

5. The main switchboard shall indicate whether the connection is live. 

6. Indicator  devices shall  be installed  to enable polarity  to be compared,  in the  case of 
direct  current,  and  phase  sequence  in  the  case  of  alternating  current,  between  the 
connection and the onboard network. 

the 

7. A panel on the connection shall indicate: 
(a) 
connection; 
measures 
(b)  the  types  of  current  and  the  nominal  voltage  and,  for  alternating  current,  the 
frequency. 

required 

make 

the 

to 

78 

Article 9.09 

Power supply to other craft 

1. When  power  is  supplied  to  other  craft,  a separate  connection  shall  be used.  If  power 
sockets  rated  at more than  16 A  are used  to  supply  current  to  other  craft,  steps  shall  be 
taken  to  ensure  (for  example,  by  the  use  of  switches  or  interlocks)  that  connection  and 
disconnection  can take place only when the line is dead. 

2. Cables and their connections shall not be subjected to any pulling load. 

3. Article 9.08, (3) to (7), shall apply by analogy. 

Article  9.10 

Generators and motors 

1.  Generators,  motors  and  their  terminal  boxes  shall  be  accessible  for  checks, 
measurements  and repairs.  The type of protection  shall  correspond to their location  (see 
Article  9.03). 

2.  Generators  driven  by the main  power  plant,  the propeller  shaft  or by  an  ancillary  set 
intended  for  another  function  shall  be  designed  as  a  function  of  the  range  of  rotational 
speeds which can occur during operation. 

Article 9.11 

Accumulators 

1. Accumulators  shall  be  accessible  and  so  arranged  as not  to  shift  with  movements  of 
the craft.  They shall not be placed where they will be exposed to excessive heat,  extreme 
cold, spray, steam or vapour. 

They shall not be installed in the wheelhouse, accommodation  or holds. This  requirement 
shall  not  apply  to  accumulators  for  portable  appliances,  or  to  accumulators  requiring  a 
charging power of less than 0.2 kW. 

2.  Accumulators  requiring  a  charging  power  of  more  than  2.0  kW  (calculated  on  the 
basis of  the maximum  charging  current  and the nominal  voltage  of  the  accumulator  and 
taking  into  account the  characteristic  charging  curve  of  the  charging  appliance)  shall  be 
installed  in a special room. If placed on deck they may also be enclosed in a cabinet. 

Accumulators  requiring  a  charging  power  not  exceeding  2.0  kW  may  also  be  installed 
below  decks  in  a cabinet  or  chest.  They  may  also be  installed  in  an  engine room  or  any 
other  well-ventilated  space  provided  that  they  are  protected  against  falling  objects  and 
dripping water. 

3. The interior surfaces  of all rooms, cabinets or boxes, shelving or other built-in  features 
intended  for  accumulators  shall  be  protected  against  the  harmful  effects  of  the 
electrolyte. 

79 

4.  Provision  shall be made for  effective  ventilation when  accumulators  are installed  in a 
closed  compartment,  cabinet  or  chest.  Forced-draught  ventilation  shall  be  provided  for 
nickel-cadmium  accumulators  requiring  a  charging  power  of  more  than  2  kW  and  for 
lead-acid accumulators requiring more than 3 kW. 

The  air  shall  enter  at the  bottom  and  be  discharged  at the  top  so  as  to  ensure  total  gas 
extraction. 

Ventilation  ducts shall not  include  any  devices which  obstruct the  air flow,  such  as  stop 
valves. 

5. The required  air throughput (Q) shall be calculated by the following  formula: 

Q = 0 . 1 1 « I -n 

[m3/h] 

where 

I represents one quarter of the maximum  current, in A, permitted by the charging  device 

n represents the number of cells. 

In  the  case  of  buffer  accumulators  within  the  onboard  network  other  methods  of 
calculation  taking  into  account  the  characteristic  charging  curve  of  the  charging  device 
may  be  accepted  by  the  inspection  body,  provided  that  these  methods  are  based  on  the 
provisions of approveçl classification  societies or on relevant standards. 

6. Where natural  ventilation  is used  the cross-section  of  the  ducts  shall  be  sufficient  for 
the required  air throughput  on the basis  of  an  air-flow  velocity  of  0.5  m/sec.  The  cross-
section  shall  be  at  least  80  cm2  for  lead-acid  accumulators  and  120  cm2  for  nickel-
cadmium  accumulators. 

7.  Where  forced-draught  ventilation  is used  a fan  shall  be  provided  -  preferably  of  the 
suction type - whose motor shall be clear of the gas or air stream. 

Fans  shall  be  so  designed  as  to  preclude  the  generation  of  sparks  through  contact 
between  a blade and the fan  casing and to avoid any electrostatic charges. 

8.  "No  smoking"  signs  having  a  minimum  diameter  of  10  cm  shall  be  affixed  to  the 
doors or covers of compartments, cabinets and chests containing  accumulators. 

Article  9.12 

Connecting  installations 

1. Electrical  switchboards 

(a)  Appliances,  switches,  protective  devices  and  switchboard  instruments  shall  be 
arranged  so as to be clearly visible and shall be accessible for maintenance  and repair. 

Terminals for  voltages up to  50 V, and those for voltages  higher than  50 V, shall be kept 
separate and marked  appropriately. 

80 

(b) For  all  switches  and  appliances  marker  plates  identifying  the  circuit  shall  be  affixed 
to the switchboards. 

The nominal  amperage and the circuit for protective devices shall be  identified. 

(c)  When  appliances  with  an  operating  voltage  greater  than  50  V  are  installed  behind 
doors  the  live  components  of  those  appliances  shall  be  protected  against  accidental 
contact while the doors are open. 

(d) The materials of switchboards shall have suitable mechanical strength and be durable, 
non-flammable  and self-extinguishing;  nor shall they be hygroscopic. 

(e)  If  fuses  with  a  high  breaking  capacity  are  installed  in  electrical  switchboards 
accessories  and  equipment  for  bodily  protection  shall  be  available  for  installing  and 
removing such  fuses. 

2.  Switches, protective  devices 

(a)  Generator  circuits  and  consumer  circuits  shall  be protected  against  short  circuits  and 
overcurrent  on  all  non-earthed  conductors.  Overload  circuit-breakers  or-fuses  may  be 
used for this purpose. 

Circuits  supplying  the  steering-gear  motors  (steering  installations)  and  their  control 
circuits  shall  only  be  protected  against  short  circuits.  Where  circuits  include  thermal 
circuit-breakers  these  shall  be  neutralised  or  set  at  not  less  than  twice  the  nominal 
amperage. 

Outputs  from  the  main  switchboard  to  appliances  operating  at  more  than  16  A 

(b) 
shall include a load or power  switch. 

(c) 
Prime  movers  for  the  craft,  the  steering  system,  the  mdder  position  indicator, 
navigation or safety  systems, and  appliances with  a nominal  amperage greater than  16 A 
shall be supplied by separate circuits. 

The  circuits  of  appliances  required  for  propelling  and  manoeuvring  the  vessel 

(d) 
shall be supplied  directly by the main  switchboard. 

(e) 
Circuit-breaking  equipment  shall  be  selected  on  the  basis  of  nominal  amperage, 
thermal  or  dynamic  strength,  and  their breaking  capacity.  Switches  shall  simultaneously 
cut off  all live conductors. The switching position shall be  identifiable. 

Fuses  shall  be  of  the  enclosed-melt  type  and  be  made  of  porcelain  or  an 
(f) 
equivalent  material.  It  shall  be  possible  to  change  them  without  any  danger  of  operator 
contact. 

3. Measuring  and monitoring  devices 

Generator,  battery  and  distribution  circuits  shall be equipped with  measuring  and 

(a) 
monitoring  devices where the safe operation of the installation so requires. 

(b) 
Non-earthed  networks  where  the  voltage  is  higher  than  50  V,  must  include  an 
earth-insulation  checking  device  equipped  with  a visual  and  audible  alarm.  In  secondary 
installations such as control  circuits, this device may be dispensed with. 

81 

4. 

Location of electrical  switchboards 

Switchboards  shall  be  located  in  accessible  and  well-ventilated  spaces  and  be 

(a) 
protected  against water and mechanical  damage. 

Piping  and  air  ducts  shall  be  so  arranged  that  in  the  event  of  leakage  the  switchboards 
cannot  be  damaged.  If their  installation  near  electrical  switchboards  is  inevitable,  pipes 
shall not have detachable connections  nearby. 

Cabinets  and  wall  recesses  in  which  unprotected  circuit-breaking  equipment  is 
(b) 
installed  shall  be  of  a non-flammable  material  or  be protected  by  a metal  or  other  non 
flammable  sheathing. 

(c)  When the voltage is greater than 50 V, insulating gratings or mats shall be placed 
at the operator's  position in front  of the main  switchboard. 

Article  9.13 

Emergency circuit breakers 

Emergency  circuit breakers for  oil burners, fuel  pumps, fuel  separators  and  engine-room 
ventilators shall be installed outside the premises containing the  equipment. 

Article  9.14 

Fixed  installations 

Equipment  seals shall be sized  as a function  of the cables to be connected  and  be 

1. 
appropriate to the types of cable used. 

Sockets  for  distribution  circuits  at  different  voltages  or  frequencies  shall  be 

2. 
impossible to  confuse. 

3. 
Switches  shall  simultaneously  switch  off  all  unearthed  conductors  within  a 
circuit.  However,  single-pole  switches  within  unearthed  circuitry  shall  be  permitted  in 
accommodation-lighting  circuits apart from  in laundries, bathrooms and washrooms. 

4. 
Where  amperage  exceeds  16 A  it  shall  be  possible to  lock  the  sockets  by  means 
of  a  switch  in  such  a way  that  the  plug  can  only  be  inserted  and  withdrawn  with  the 
power switched  off. 

Article  9.15 

Cables 

1. 

Cables shall be flame-retardant,  self-extinguishing  and resistant to water and oil. 

In  accommodation,  other  types  of  cable may  be used,  provided  that they  are  effectively 
protected,  have flame-retardant  characteristics  and are  self-extinguishing. 

82 

Cables with  conducting wires with  a minimum  cross-section  of  1.5  mm2  shall  be 

2. 
used for power and lighting circuits. 

The armouring and metal sheathing of power and lighting circuits shall not,  under 

3. 
normal operating conditions, be used as conductor wires or earth wires. 

The  armouring  and  metal  sheathing  of  power  and  lighting  circuits  shall  be 

4. 
earthed  at least at one end. 

The  cross-section  of  conductor  wires  shall  take  account  of  the  final  permissible 
5. 
maximum  temperature  of  conductor  wires  (maximum  permissible  amperage)  and 
permissible  voltage  drop.  Such  a  drop  between  the  main  switchboard  and  the  least 
favourable  point on the circuit shall not be more than  5% of nominal voltage for  lighting 
or more then 7% for power or heating circuits. 

6. 

Cables shall be protected  against mechanical  damage. 

The  means  of  fixing  the  cables  shall  ensure that  any pulling  load  remains  within 

7. 
the permissible limits. 

8. 
When  cables  pass  through  partitions  or  decks,  the  mechanical  strength, 
watertightness  and  fire  resistance  of  these  partitions  and  decks  shall  not  be  affected  by 
the seals. 

9. 
Cables  linking  mobile  wheelhouses  shall  be  sufficiently  flexible  and  be  fitted 
with  insulation  with  sufficient  flexibility  down  to  -20  °C  and  resistance  to  steam  and 
vapour, ultraviolet rays, ozone, etc. 

Article  9.16 

Lighting  installations 

Lighting  appliances  shall  be so installed  that the  heat they  emit  cannot  set fire  to 

1. 
nearby  inflammable  objects or components. 

Lighting  appliances  on  open  decks  shall  be  so  installed  as  not  to  impede  the 

2. 
recognition  of signal lights. 

When  two  or  more  lighting  appliances  are  installed  in  an  engine  room  or  boiler 
3. 
room, they shall be supplied by at least two  different  circuits. This requirement  shall  also 
apply to spaces where cooling or hydraulic machinery,  or electric motors, are installed. 

Article  9.17 

Signal  lights 

1. 
The  switchboards  for  the signal  lights  shall  be  installed  in the wheelhouse.  They 
shall  be  supplied  by  a  separate  feeder  from  the  main  switchboard  or  by  two  separate 
secondary  networks. 

Lights  shall  be  individually  supplied  from  the  lighting  panel  and  be  individually 

2. 
protected  and  controlled. 

83 

3. - •  Tell-tale  lamps  or  other  equivalent  devices  monitoring  the  signal  lights  shall  be 
the 
placed  on  the  switchboard  in  the  wheelhouse  unless  direct  monitoring  from 
wheelhouse  is possible. No  fault  in the monitoring  installation  shall  affect  the  operation 
of the light which it monitors. 

Several  lights  forming  a functional  unit  and  installed  together  at  the  same  point 
4. 
may  be jointly  supplied,  controlled  and  monitored.  The  monitoring  installation  shall  be 
capable of identifying  the failure  of  any of these lights. However,  it shall not be  possible 
to use both  light sources  in a double  light  (two  lights mounted  one above the other  or  in 
the same housing)  simultaneously. 

Article  9.18 

Emergency  installations 

1. 
Day-excursion  craft  having  a length LF of  at least 25 m,  and  cabin  craft,  shall  be 
equipped  with  emergency  installations  which  can  be  used  to  supply  power  to  the 
electrical installations listed in section 3 below if the main power supply is interrupted. 

The  emergency  installation  (emergency  source  and  its  switchboard)  shall  be 
2. 
installed  outside  the  main  engine  room  and  the  space  where  the  main  switchboard  is 
located  and  shall  be  separated  from  those  spaces  by  fire-resistant  and  watertight 
bulkheads. 

) 

3. 
Auxiliary power sources shall be capable of supplying  simultaneously  at least  the 
following  electrical  installations  where  these  are  specified  and  if  they  have  no 
independent power  supply: 
Signal lights; 
(a) 
Audible warning devices; 
(b) 
Emergency  lighting of the premises and stations referred  to in article  15.10, (7); 
(c) 
Radio telephone  equipment; 
(d) 
Alarm  and loudspeaker systems; 
(e) 
Emergency  floodlight; 
(f) 
Fire alarm  system; 
(g) 
(h) 
Other  safety  installations  such  as  sprinkler  fire  extinguishers  or  a  second  fire 
pump. 

The emergency source of power may be: 

4. 
(a) An  auxiliary  set whose fuel  supply  system  and cooling  system  are independent  of  the 
main  power  plant  and  which,  in the  event  of  a network  failure,  is  started  automatically, 
or can be started manually if it is installed in the immediate vicinity  of the wheelhouse  or 
other  station  that  is  manned  continuously  by  qualified  crew  members,  and  can  provide 
the entire power supply within 30 seconds, or 

(b)  An  accumulator  battery  which,  in  the  event  of  a  network  failure,  is  automatically 
phased to the line or can be started  manually  if it is installed  in the immediate vicinity  of 
the wheelhouse  or other  station  that  is manned  continuously  by  qualified  crew  members 
and can provide the consumers listed with power for the required  amount of time without 
being recharged  and without any unacceptable fall  in voltage. 

The operating time for  emergency  equipment shall be determined  in accordance  with  the 
intended use of the craft,  but shall in any event not be less than 30 minutes. 

84 

A  failure  of  the  main  or  emergency  power  equipment  shall  not  adversely  affect 

5. 
the operational  safety  of the installations. 

Article  9.19 

Alarm and safety systems for  mechanical  equipment 

The alarm  and  safety  systems for  monitoring  and protecting  mechanical  equipment  shall 
meet the following  requirements: 

(a) Alarm  systems 

The  alarm  systems  shall  be  so  designed  that  no  failure  in the  alarm  system  can result  in 
failure  of the apparatus or equipment being  monitored. 

Binary  transmitters  shall  be  designed  on  the  quiescent-current  principle  or  on  the 
monitored  load-current principle. 

Visual  alarms  shall  remain  visible  until  the  fault  has  been  remedied;  an  alarm  with 
acknowledgement  shall  be  distinguishable  from  an  alarm  without  acknowledgement. 
Each  alarm  shall  also  comprise  an  audible  warning.  It  shall  be  possible  to  switch  off 
acoustic  alarms.  Switching  off  one  acoustic  alarm  shall  not  prevent  another  signal  from 
being set off by another cause. 

Exceptions  shall  be  permitted  in  the  case  of  alarm  systems  comprising  less  than  5 
measurement points. 

(b) 

Safety  systems 

Safety  systems  shall  be  designed  to  halt  or  slow  down  the  operation  of  the  affected 
equipment,  or to  warn  a  permanently-manned  station  to  do  so  before  a  critical  state  is 
reached. 
Binary transmitters shall be designed  according to the load-current principle. 
If  safety  systems  are  not  designed  to  be  self-monitoring  their  operation  must  be 
checkable. 
Safety  systems must be independent of other systems. 

Article  9.20 

Electronic  equipment 

1. 

General 

The  test  conditions  in  2  below  shall  apply  only  to  electronic  devices  and  their 
ancillaries on the steering system and the craft's  power plants. 

2. 

(a) 

Test  conditions 

The stresses arising from  the test shall not cause electronic devices to be  damaged 
or to malfunction.  The tests  in  accordance with  the  international  standards,  such 
as publication  IEC 92-504  concerning  these,  shall  be  carried  out  with  the  device 
in  operation,  apart  from  the  cold-proofing  test,  the  test  consisting  of  checking 
operation. 

85 

(b) 

Variations in voltage and  frequency 

Value for 

Variations 

service 

continuous 

short-duration 

General 

frequency 

Battery operation 

voltage 

voltage 

+ 5% 

+ 10% 

+ 10% 5  s 

+ 20% 1.5 s 

+ 30% / - 25% 

• 

(c) 

Heating test 

•  The  sample  is  brought  up  to  a  temperature  of  55°C  within  a  half-hour  period. 
After  that  temperature  has  been  achieved  it  is  maintained  for  16  hours.  An 
operating test is then  conducted. 

(d) 

Cold-condition  test 

The sample is shut down and cooled to -25°C and held at that temperature for  two 
hours.  The temperature is then raised to 0°C and an operating test is  conducted. 

(e) 

Vibration test 

The  vibration  test  shall  be  carried  out  along  the  three  axes  at  the  resonance 
frequency  of the appliances  or parts for  the period  of  90 minutes  in each  case.  If 
no clear resonance emerges the vibration test takes place at 30 Hz. 

The  vibration  test  takes  place  via  sinusoidal  oscillation  within  the  following 
limits: 

General: 

f = 2 . 0 at  13.2 Hz;  a = ±  1mm 
(amplitude  a = Vt the vibration width) 

f =  13.2 Hz at  100 Hz;  acceleration ±  0.7g. 

Equipment  intended  to  be  fitted  to  diesel  engines  or  steering  system  shall  be 
tested  as follows: 

f=  2.0 to 25 Hz;  a = ±  1.6mm 
(amplitude  a = V: the vibration width) 

f = 25 Hz at  100 Hz;  acceleration ± 4g. 

The  sensors  intended  to  be  installed  in  diesel-engine  exhaust  pipes  may  be 
exposed to considerably  higher stresses.  Account shall be taken  of this during  the 
tests. 

(0 

The  electromagnetic  compatibility  test  shall  be  carried  out  on  the  basis  of  EEC 
publications  801-2,  801-3,  801-4, 801-5 at test degree number 3. 

86 

(g) 

Proof that the electronic equipment is adequate for these test conditions shall be 
provided  by  their  manufacturer.  A  certificate  by  a  classification  society  is 
likewise considered to be proof. 

Article 9.21 

Electromagnetic compatibility 

The  operation  of  the  electric  and  electromagnetic  systems  shall  not  be  impaired  by 
electromagnetic interference.  General accompanying measures shall concentrate on: 

(a) 

disconnection  of  the transmission  paths  between  the  source  of  interference  and 
the user appliances; 

(b) 

reducing the causes of disturbance at their source; 

(c) 

reducing the sensitivity of the consumer appliances to interference. 

87 

Chapter  10 

RIGGING 

Article  10.01 

Anchors,  chains and anchor  hawsers 

The bows  of vessels  intended  for the  carriage of goods,  apart from  ship-mounted 
1. 
lighters whose length L  does not  exceed  40m,  and tugs,  shall  be  equipped,  with  anchors 
whose total mass P is obtained  from  the following  formula: 

where 

P = k • B • T [kg] 

k  is  a coefficient  that  takes  account  of  the  relationship  between  length  L  and  beam  B, 

and of the type of vessel 

k = cV 

8*B 

for pushed lighters however,  k = c will be taken; 

c is an empirical  coefficient  given in the following  table 

Dead weight tonnage 

Coefficient  (c) 

up to 4001 inclusive 
from 400 to 6501 inclusive 
from 650 to 1  000 t inclusive 
more than 1  000 t 

45 
55 
65 
70 

Vessels  whose  dead weight  tonnage  is not greater  than  400 T  and which,  owing  to  their 
design  and  intended  purpose,  are  only  used  on  predetermined  short-haul  sections,  the 
inspection body  may  accept that only two-thirds  of total mass P  are required  for  the bow 
anchors. 

Passenger vessels shall be fitted  with bow anchors whose total mass P is obtained 

2. 
from  the following  formula: 

where 

P = k • B • T [kg] 

k 

is the coefficient  corresponding to section  1, but where in order to obtain the value of 
the  empirical  coefficient  (c) the  displacement  in m3 mentioned  in the  certificate  shall 
be taken instead of the dead weight tonnage. 

88 

3.  - -  The vessels  referred  to  in section  1 shall  be fitted  with  stem  anchors whose  total 
mass is equal to 25% of mass P calculated  in accordance with that figure. 

Vessels  whose  maximum  length  exceeds  86 m  shall,  however,  be  fitted  with  stem 
anchors  whose  total  mass  is  equal  to  50%  of  mass  P  calculated  in  accordance  with 
section  1  or section 2. 

The following  vessels are exempted  from  the stem anchor  requirement: 

(a) 

vessels  for  which the  stem  anchor mass  will  be  less than  150 kg;  in the  case  of 
the vessels  referred  to  in  section  1, fmal  paragraph,  it is the reduced  mass  of  the 
anchors which must be taken into account; 

(b) 

pushed  lighters. 

Vessels intended to propel trains of vessels not more than  86 m in length  shall  be 
4. 
fitted  with  stem  anchors  whose  total  mass  is  equal  to  25%  of  maximum  mass  P 
-  calculated  in  accordance  with  section  1  for  the  largest  formation  (considered  to  be  a 

nautical unit) permitted  and mentioned on the  certificate. 

The vessels  intended to propel  downstream  rigid trains that are longer than  86 m shall be 
fitted  with  stem  anchors whose  total  mass  equals  50% of the greatest  mass  P  calculated 
in accordance with section  1 for the largest formation  (considered to be a nautical unit) p 
permitted  and mentioned on the  certificate. 

The  anchor  masses  established  in  accordance  with  Sections  1-4  may  be  reduced 

5. 
for  certain special anchors. 

6. 
Total  mass  P  specified  for  bow  anchors  may  be  distributed  among  one  or  two 
anchors.  It may be reduced  by  15% where the vessel  is only equipped with  a single bow 
anchor and the mooring pipe is located amidships. 

The  total  mass  laid  down  in  this  Article  for  stem  anchors  for  pusher  boats  and  vessels 
whose maximum  length exceeds  86 m may be distributed between one or two anchors. 

The mass if the lightest anchor should not be less than 45% of that.total mass. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Cast iron anchors shall not be permitted. 

The mass of the anchors shall stand out in relief in a durable manner. 

Anchors having a mass in excess of 50 kg shall be equipped with windlasses. 

10. 

Each anchor chain shall have a length  of: 

(a) 

at least 40 m for vessels not exceeding 30 m in length; 

(b) 

at least  10 m longer than the vessel where this is between 30 and  50 m in length; 

(c) 

at least 60 m where vessels are more than  50 m in length. 

Each of the stem  anchor chains shall be at least 40 m long.  However, where vessels need 
to stop facing  downstream they shall have stem  anchor chains that are each at least  60 m 
in length. 

89 

The minimum  tensile  strength  of the  anchor  chains  shall be  calculated  by  means 

11 
of the following  formulae: 

(a) 
(b) 

anchors having a mass of 0-500 kg:  R = 0.35 • P'  [kN] 
anchors having a mass of more than 500 kg and not exceeding 2000 kg: 

R = ( o . 3 5 -_  P?  -  500  )  P'  [kN]: 

15000 

(c) 

anchors having a mass of more than 2000 kg 

R = 250  • P'  [kN]. 

In  these  formulae  P'  is  the  theoretical  mass  of  each  anchor  determined  in  accordance 
with sections  1-4  and 6. 

The tensile strength of anchor  chains shall be that stated  by one of the standards  in  force 
in one of the Member  States. 

Where  the  anchors  have  a  mass  greater  than  that  required  by  sections  1-6,  the  tensile 
strength  of  the  anchor  chain  shall  be  determined  as  a  function  of  that  highest  anchor 
mass. 

If the rigging  of  a vessel  includes heavier  anchors with  correspondingly  stronger 
12. 
anchor  chains, the  information  to be entered  in the  certificate  shall however not  mention 
the  masses  and  theoretical  tensile  strengths  arising  from  meeting  the  requirements  of 
sections  1-6  and  11. 

The  attachments  between  anchor  and  chain  shall  withstand  a  tensile  load  20% 

13. 
higher than the tensile strength of the corresponding  chain. 

The use  of  cables  instead  of  anchor  chains  shall  be  authorised.  The  cables  shall 

14. 
have the same tensile strength as that required for  chains, but must be 20% longer. 

Article  10.02 

Other forms  of rigging 

According  to  the  police  requirements  in  force  in  the  Member  States,  the 

1. 
following  forms  of rigging shall be on board: 

(a) 

radio-telephone  system; 

(b) 

appliances and devices needed to provide visual  and audible signals, or to  provide 
vessel  identification; 

(c) 

stand-alone emergency  lights for the prescribed mooring lights; 

(d) 

(e) 

a fire-proof,  marked  receptacle, with  cover,  to receive special  solid wastes,  and  a 
fire-resistant,  marked  receptacle, with cover, for  special liquid wastes; 

a fire-proof,  marked  receptacle,  with  cover,  to  receive  other  liquid/solid  wastes, 
and  a  fire-proof,  marked  receptacle,  with  cover,  to  receive  other  special  liquid 
wastes defined  in accordance with the police requirements  in force  in the Member 
States. 

90 

(f) 

2. 

a fire-proof,  marked  receptacle, with cover, to receive residues (slops). 

In addition, the rigging shall  include at least: 

(a) 

mooring cables: 

Vessels  shall  be  fitted  with  three  mooring  cables.  Their  minimum  lengths  shall 
be at least the  following. 

first  cable:  L  +  20  m, but not more than  100 m, 
second  cable:  two thirds of the first  cable, 
third  cable:  one third of the first  cable. 

The  shortest  cable  is  not  required  on  board  vessels  whose  L  is  less  than  20 m. 
Those cables shall have  a tensile  strength  R^ that  is calculated  in accordance with 
the following  formulae; 

ForL  •  B  •  Tup  to  1000 m3  Rs  =  60  L  •_  B  •_  T 

in  [kN] 

10 

ForL  •  B  •  T exceeding  1000 m3: Rs  =  150  L  •_  B  ^_ T 

in  [kN] 

100 

These  cables may be replaced  by  synthetic-fibre  rope having the same  length  and 
tensile strength. 

(b) 

Towing cables: 

Tugs  shall  be  equipped  with  a  number  of  cables  that  are  suitable  for  their 
operation. 

However,  the most important cable shall be at least  100 m long  and  have a tensile 
strength,  in  N,  not  less  than  one  third  of  the  total  power,  in  kW,  of  the  power 
plant(s). 

Self-propelled  barges  and  pusher boats that  are also able to tow shall be  equipped 
with  an at least  100-m  long towing  cable whose tensile  strength,  in N,  is not  less 
than one quarter of the total power,  in kW, of the power plant(s). 

(c) 

A heaving line; 

(d) 

a  boarding  gangway  at  least  0.4 m  wide  and  4 m  long  whose  side  edges  are 
that  gangway  shall  be  equipped  with  a 
defined  by  a  brightly-coloured  strip; 
handrail.  The inspection body may permit shorter gangways for  small vessels; 

(e) 

a gaff  hook; 

(f) 

a bandaging kit; 

(g) 

a pair of binoculars, minimum  7 x 50; 

(h) 

a notice concerning the rescue of men  overboard. 

3. 

There  shall  be  an  embarkation  stairway  or  ladder  on  vessels  whose  flank  height 
above the unladen waterline exceeds  1.50  m. 

<5A 

Article  10.03 

Fire-fighting  equipment 

1. 

(a) 
(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

(e) 

There shall be on board at least: 

in the wheelhouse: 
close to each means of access to the 
deck and accommodation: 

close to each means of access to service 
premises that are not accessible  from 
the accommodation, and which contain 
heating, cooking or refrigeration 
equipment using solid.or liquid fuels 

at each entrance to the engine room and 
boiler rooms: 

at an appropriate point in the engine rooms 
that is beneath the deck, where the total 
power output is more than 100 kW: 

1 portable fire extinguisher, 

1 portable fire extinguisher, 

1 portable fire extinguisher, 

1 portable fire extinguisher, 

1 portable fire extinguisher. 

2. 

Portable fire  extinguishers shall meet the following  conditions: 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

The  capacity  of  the  fluid-type  portable  fire  extinguishers  required  by  section 1 
shall be 9-13.5 litres;  Powder-type  extinguishers  shall contain at least 6 kg. 

The  extinguishing  substance  used  in  the  portable  fire  extinguishers  required  by 
section  1 shall  be  suitable  for  at  least  the  fire  category  that  is to  be  most  feared 
within those confines  for which the extinguishers  has mainly been  intended.  The 
extinguishing  substance on board vessels whose  eiectrical  systems  have  a  service 
voltage  of more than  50 V shall  also be suitable for  fighting  electrical  fires.  The 
instructions for use shall be clearly set out on each portable  extinguisher. 

The extinguishing  substance may  be neither  halon  nor  contain  a product which  is 
likely  to  release  toxic  gases  during  use,  such  as  carbon  tetracholoride.  Portable 
fire  extinguishers  using  C02  may  only  be used  to fight  fires  at  specific  locations 
such  as control  panels, kitchens;  the quantity  of  C02  may not  constitute  a health 
hazard. 

(d) 

Extinguishers  that  are  sensitive  to  freezing  or  to  heat  shall  be  installed  or 
protected  in such  a way that their proper functioning  is always guaranteed. 

Fire  extinguishers  shall  be checked  at least  every two years.  A  certificate  to  that 

3. 
effect  signed by the person  having carried out the check shall be kept on board. 

If  extinguishers  are  installed  in  such  a way  that  they  are  out  of  sight  the  panel 

4. 
covering them  shall be identified  by a red F at least  10 cm in height. 

The  use  of  halon  is  not  authorised  in  permanently-installed  extinguishing 

5. 
systems;  C02  is authorised  as an extinguishing  substance where: 

(a) 

the  C02  extinguishing  systems  can  only  be  actuated  in  the  engine  rooms,  boiler 
rooms  and  pump  rooms.  Devices  should  be  installed  which  enable  all  of  the 
orifices  that  are  likely  to  allow  air  to  enter,  or  C02  to  exit,  the  premises  to  be 

92 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

(e) 

protected.  The  triggering  devices  shall  be  installed  in  such  a  way  that  their 
actuation  is  possible  even  in  the  event  of  a  fire;  The  automatic  release  of  C02 
shall not be permitted. 

The  combustion  air  needed  for  the  internal  combustion  engines  intended  for 
vessel  propulsion  shall  not  be  drawn  from  the  engine  rooms,  boiler  rooms  or 
pump rooms. 

All  permanently-installed  C02  extinguishing  systems  shall  be  fitted  with  a 
warning  device whose signals are clearly  audible  even under the noisiest  possible 
operating  conditions on all of the premises that can be flooded  with  C02  gas  and 
which  can be  clearly  distinguished  from  all  of the  other  audible warning  devices 
on board.  These C02  alarms  shall  also be clearly  audible in the adjoining  rooms 
with 
the  communicating  doors  closed,  and  under  operating  conditions 
corresponding to the greatest amount of inherent noise possible, where removal  is 
possible via the premises which are to be flooded  with C02  gas.  The  C02  alarm 
shall operate for a suitable period before the release of the  C 02. 

A panel  containing the following  message in red  letters on a white  background  in 
the Dutch, French and German languages shall be affixed  at a suitable point at the 
exit and entrance of all of the premises likely to be affected  by C02 : 

"Bei  Ertônen  des  C02  -Warnsignals 
sofort verlassen!  Erstickungsgefahr!" 

(Beschreibung  des  Signals)  den  Raum 

"Quitter immédiatement  ce local au signal C02  ... (description  du signal)! Danger 
d'asphyxie!" 

,-

""Bij  het in werking treden van het  C02 -Alarmsignaal-  ...  (omschrijving  van  het 
signaal) deze ruimte onmiddelijk  verlaten!  Verstikkingsgevaar!" 

The  instructions  for  use  in  the  Dutch,  French  and  German  languages  shall  be 
affixed  in  a  clearly  legible  and  durable  manner  close  to  all  C02  extinguisher 
actuators.  The  pipework  reaching  the  various  premises  that  are  likely  to  be 
affected  by  C02  shall be fitted  with  a shut-off  device.  Before  the  extinguishing 
system  is  triggered  the  alarm  required  under  (c)  shall  previously  be  activated 
automatically. 

The C02  containers shall be placed  in a room  or cabinet that is separate from  the 
other  premises  and  is  proof  against  gas  leaks.  The  doors  of  those  rooms  or 
cabinets shall open outwards, be lockable and bear the message "C02"  in red  on a 
white background. 

Premises  located  below  the  deck  shall  only  be  accessible  directly  from  outside. 
No direct links with other premises shall be permitted. 

Premises  located  beneath  the  deck  shall  have  adequate  stand-alone  ventilation 
that  is  completely  separate  from  the  other  on-board  ventilation  systems.  The 
ventilation  apertures  shall  be  arranged  in  such  a way  that  if  there  is  a  leak  from 
the C02  container the gas cannot reach the inner parts of the vessel. 

The temperature within those premises shall not exceed  50°C. 

Cabinets or lockers shall only be permitted  on the deck if they  are firmly  attached 
and  outside the accommodation  area.  If there is a leak from  the C02  container  it 
shall not be possible for the gas to reach the inner parts of the vessel. 

The  cabinets  or  lockers  shall  protect  the  containers  against  heat,  cold  and 
humidity.  The temperature within these shall not exceed  50°C. 

93 

Premises  protected  against  CO2  shall  be  equipped  with  suitable  extinguishing 
substance  extractors.  It shall  not be  possible  to  actuate  the  extractors  during  the 
extinguishing process. 

(f) 

The  piping  system  installed  in  the  engine  rooms  shall  enable  85%  of  the  gas, 
whose  quantity  is determined  in accordance with the second  paragraph,  to  be  fed 
into the premises within a two-minute period. 

The minimum  quantity of C02  needed for the premises to be protected  shall be at 
least 40% of the gross volume of those premises.  0.56m3/kg shall be taken  as the 
volume of C02  released.  If the quantity  of  C02  is intended  to protect  more than 
one enclosed  space the total  quantity  of  C02  available which  is needed to  protect 
one single such space shall be  sufficient. 

The filling  rate of the C02  containers shall not exceed  0.75 kg/1. 

The containers shall be placed upright and protected  against  falling. 

Pressurised  containers,  C02  fittings  and  pipework  shall meet  the Member  States' 
requirements. 

(g) 

The  alarms  referred  to  under  (c)  and  the  extinguishing  equipment  shall  be 
checked  at least every two years by an approved  expert. 

The  dated  inspection  certificates,  signed  by the  inspector  involved,  shall  be  kept 
on board. 

(h) 

If there are one or more permanently  installed  C02  extinguisher  systems this  shall 
be mentioned  in the  certificate. 

Other  extinguishing  substances  shall  only  be  authorised  on  the  basis  of 
recommendations by the competent  authorities. 

Article  10.04 

Dinghies 

1. 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

The following  craft  shall carry a dinghy: 

self-propelled  barges and barges exceeding  150 tonnes dwt; 

tugs and pusher boats with a displacement of more than  150 m3; 

floating  equipment; 

passenger  vessels  authorised  to  carry  more  than  250  passengers  or  fitted  with 
more than 50 beds. 

2. 
It  shall  be  possible  for  one  person  to  launch  such  dinghies  safely.  If  a  powered 
launching  device  is  used  this  shall  be  such  that  safe,  quick  launching  shall  not  be 
impaired  if its power supply  fails. 

3. 

(a) 

Dinghies shall meet the following  requirements: 

they  shall  be  easy  to  steer  and  manoeuvre,  they  shall  maintain  their  course  and 
not drift  significantly  under the effect  of the wind, the current or the waves; 

(b) 

they shall be able to seat at least three passengers; 

94 

(c) 

(d) 

(e) 

(f) 

(g) 

(h) 

they shall be adequately  strong; 

their  volume  shall  be  at  least  1.5 m3,  or  the  product  of  LD  •  BD  •  HD  shall 
represent at least 2.7 m3; 

their  freeboard  shall  be  at  least  25  cm  with  three  passengers  weighing  roughly 
75 kg on board; 

they  shall  be  adequately  stable.  This  shall  be  considered  adequate  if  there  is  a 
residual  freeboard  of  at least  10 cm if two roughly  75 kg persons  are on one  side 
as close as possible to the gunwale; 

their  buoyancy  in  N  with  no  passengers  on  board,  but  completely  filled  with 
water shall be at least 300 x LD • BD • HD; 

the following  gear shall be on board: 
one set of oars; 
one mooring rope; 
one bailer. 

Inflatable  dinghies  shall be permitted  if the conditions set out in  Sections  2 and 3 
are  met, 
are 
multiple-compartment  inflatable  dinghies. 

are  permanently 

service 

ready 

they 

they 

and 

for 

4. 
If  a  dinghy  is  considered  to  be  an  item  of  collective  survival  equipment  for  a 
passenger vessel  (Article  15.08,  Section  5) it shall  at  least  meet the  conditions  set out  in 
Section 3.  However: 

X 

(a) 

(b) 

the  seating  width  on  the  benches  shall  be  at  least  0.45  m  per  person,  while  the 
maximum permissible number of persons  shall not exceed the product of 3 x LD • 
BD-HD; 

their stability shall be considered  adequate if there is a freeboard  of  at least  10 cm 
when  half  of  the  maximum  number  of  passengers  permitted  are  in  position  on 
one side of the dinghy. 

5. 

In Sections 3 and 4: 

LD 
BD 
HD 

means the length L of the dinghy,  in m, 
means the beam  of the dinghy, in m, 
means the height of the dinghy's  sides, in m. 

u 

Article  10.05 

Buoys and life jackets 

1. 
There shall be at least three life buoys on board  craft.  They shall be ready  for  use 
and  attached  to the  deck  at  appropriate  points  without  being  attached  to  their  mounting. 
At least one life buoy shall be in the immediate vicinity  of the wheelhouse. 

Life buoys shall: 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

provide a buoyancy of at least  100 N in fresh  water; 

be  made  of  a  suitable  material  and  be  resistant  to  oil  and  oil-derived  products, 
and to temperatures of not more than 50°C; 

be so coloured  as to be clearly visible in water; 

to have an inherent mass of at least 2.5 kg; 

6T 

(e) 

have an internal diameter of 45 cm +  10%; 

(f) 

be surrounded  by grab ropes. 

A  life jacket  shall  be  within  reach  of  every  person  who  is  regularly  on  board  a 

2. 
craft. 

Life jackets  shall  meet  the  requirements  of  Section  1(a)  -  (c),  or  of  European  standard 
EN 395 (buoyancy of  100 N). 

Inflatable  life jackets shall inflate  automatically  and manually  and shall  also be  inflatable 
by mouth.  They shall be checked  in accordance with the manufacturer's  instmctions. 

9£ 

Chapter 11 

SAFETY AT WORK  STATIONS 

Article  11.01 

General 

Vessels shall be built,  arranged  and equipped  in such a way  as to  enable the  crew 

1. 
to work and move about in complete  safety. 

The  necessary  on-board  working  facilities  and  permanent  fixtures  shall  be 
2. 
arranged,  laid  out  and  protected  in  such  a  way  as  to  permit  safe,  easy  movement  on 
board,  and  maintenance.  If  necessary,  mobile  or high-temperature  components  shall  be 
fitted  with safety  devices. 

Article  11.02 

Protection  against  falling 

Decks  and  gunwales  shall  be  flat  and  at  no  point  be  likely  to  cause  tripping,  it 

1. 
shall be impossible for puddles to  form. 

Decks,  gunwales,  engine-room  floors,  landings,  stairways  and  the  tops  of 

2. 
gunwale bollards shall be designed to prevent slipping. 

The tops of gunwale bollards  and  obstacles  in  passageways,  such  as the  edges  of 

3. 
steps, shall be painted in a colour contrasting with the surrounding  deck. 

The  outer  edges  of  decks  and  gunwales,  as well  as work  stations  where  persons 
4. 
might fall  more than  1 metre,  shall be fitted  with  rails  or  coamings  that  are  at  least  0.70 
m  high  or with  a guard  rail  in  accordance with  European  Standard  EN  711,  which  shall 
comprise  a handrail,  a rail  at knee height  and  a foot-rail.  Gunwales  shall  be fitted  with  a 
foot-rail  and  a  continuous  hand-rail  that  is  secured  to  the  coaming.  Coaming  hand-rails 
shall not be required where gunwales are fitted with non-retractable shipside guard rails. 

Article  11.03 

Dimensions  of working spaces 

Working  spaces  shall  be  large  enough  to  provide  every  person  working  at  them  with 
adequate freedom  of movement. 

Article  11.04 

Gunwale 

The  clear  width  of  the  gunwale  shall  be  at  least  0.60  m.  That  figure  may  be 
1. 
reduced  to  0.5 m  at certain  points  that have been  designed  for  safety  of  operations  such 
as deck-swabbing  cocks.  It may be reduced to 0.4 m at bollard  emplacements. 

97 

2. 
Up to à clear height of 0.90 m above the gunwale, the clear width of the gunwale 
may be reduced to 0.54 m provided that the clear width above, between the outer edge of 
the hull  and the inner  edge of the hold,  is not  less than  0.65  m.  In this  case, the clear 
width of the gunwale may be reduced to 0.50 m if the outer edge of the gunwale is fitted 
with a guard rail in accordance with European  Standard EN 711 to prevent  falling.  On 
craft  55 m or less in length without aft accommodation, the guard rail may be dispensed 
with. 

The requirements of 1  and 2 above shall apply up to a height of 2.00 m above the 

3. 
gunwale. 

Article 11.05 

Access to working spaces 

Points of access and passageways for the movement of persons and objects shall 

1. 
be of sufficient  size and so arranged that: 

(a) 

in front of the access opening, there is sufficient  room not to impede movement; 

(b) 
the clear width of the passageway shall be appropriate for the intended use of the 
working space and shall be not less than 0.60 m, except in the case of craft  less than 8 m 
wide, where it may be reduced to 0.50 m; 

(c) 

the combined height of the passageway and the coaming is not less than 1.90 m. 

Doors shall be so arranged that they can be opened and closed safely  from  either 

2. 
side. They shall be protected against accidental opening or closing. 

Stairs, ladders or steps shall be installed in accesses, exits and passageways where 

3. 
there is more than a 0.50 m difference  in floor level. 

4.  Working spaces which are manned continuously shall be fitted with stairs if there 
is  a  difference  in  floor  level  of  more  than  1 m.  This  requirement  shall  not  apply  to 
emergency exits. 

5. 
Craft equipped with holds shall have at least two movable hold ladders which can 
be used to enter and leave the hold in complete safety.  This requirement shall not apply 
where an equivalent ladder is fixed permanently in each hold. 

Article 11.06 

Exits and emergency exits 

The  number,  arrangement  and  dimensions  of  exits,  including  emergency  exits, 
1. 
shall be in keeping with the use and dimensions of the relevant space.  Where one of the 
exits is an emergency exit, it shall be clearly marked as such. 

Emergency  exits or windows or the covers of skylights to be used as emergency 
2. 
exits shall have a clear opening of not less than 0.36 m2, and the smallest dimension shall 
be not less than 0.50 m. 

98 

Article  11.07 

Ladders,  steps and similar  devices 

1. 
Stairs  and  ladders  shall  be securely  fixed.  Stairs  shall  be not  less  than  0.60  wide 
and the usable width  between hand-rails  shall be not  less than  0.60  m;  steps  shall  be  not 
less than  0.15  m  high;  steps  shall  have  non-slip  surfaces  and  stairs  with  more  than  four 
steps shall be fitted  with hand-rails. 

Ladders and steps shall have a usable width of not less than  0.30 m; steps shall be 

2. 
not more than 0.30 m highland the steps of structures  shall be not less than 0.15 m high. 

Ladders  and  steps  shall  be  clearly  identifiable  as  such  from  above  and  shall  be 

3. 
equipped with safety  handles above exit openings. 

4. 
Movable  ladders  shall  be  at  least  0.40  m  wide,  and  at  least  0.50  m  wide  at  the 
base;  it  shall  be  possible  to  ensure  that  they  will  not  topple  or  skid;  the  mngs  shall  be 
securely fixed  in the uprights. 

Movable ladders used as hold ladders shall, with a 60° incline,  extend  at least  1 m 

5. 
above the upper edge of the hatchway,  and in any event above the bottom. 

Article  11.08 

Inside  spaces 

The  dimensions,  arrangement  and  layout  of  inside  working  spaces  shall  be  in 
1. 
keeping  with  the  work  to  be  carried  out  and  shall  meet  the  health  and  safety 
requirements.  They  shall  be  equipped  with  adequate  non-dazzle  lighting  and  with 
ventilation  arrangements;  if  necessary,  they  shall  be  fitted  with  heating  appliances 
capable of maintaining  an adequate temperature. 

2. 
The  floors  of  inside  working  spaces  shall  be  solid  and  durable,  and  shall  be 
designed  not  to  cause  tripping  or  slipping.  Openings  in  decks  and  floors  shall,  when 
open,  be  equipped  with  guards,  and  windows  and  skylights  shall  be  so  arranged  and 
fitted  that they can be operated  and cleaned  safely. 

Article  11.09 

Protection against noise and vibration 

Working  spaces  shall  be  so  situated,  equipped  and  designed  that  crew  members 

1. 
are not exposed to harmful  vibrations. 

Permanent working  spaces shall, in addition, be so constructed  and  soundproofed 

2. 
that the health  and safety  of crew members  are not affected  by noise. 

99 

3. 
Persons who  are continuously  exposed  to noise  levels  likely to  exceed  85  dB(A) 
should  be  provided  with  individual  acoustic  protection  devices.  A  reminder  that  the 
wearing  of  such  devices  is mandatory  shall  be  displayed  in working  spaces  where  noise 
levels exceed  90 dB(A). 

Article  11.10 

Hatch  covers 

Hatch  covers  shall  be  easily  accessible  and  safe  to  handle.  Hatch-cover 
1. 
components neighing more than 40 kg shall be designed to slide or pivot or be fitted  with 
mechanical  opening  devices.  Hatch  covers  operated  by  lifting  gear  shall  be  fitted  with 
easily  accessible  attachment  devices.  Non-interchangeable  hatch  covers  and  upper  sills 
shall  be  clearly  marked  to  show  the  hatches  to  which  they  belong  and  their  correct 
position on those hatches. 

Hatch  covers shall be secured  against being tilted by the wind  or by  loading  gear. 
2. 
Sliding  covers  shall be fitted  with  catches to prevent  accidental horizontal  movement  of 
more  than  0.40  m;  they  shall  be  capable  of  being  locked  in  their  fmal  position. 
Appropriate devices shall be fitted  to hold stacked hatch covers in position. 

The  power  supply  for  mechanically  operated  hatch  covers  must  be  cut  off 

3. 
automatically when the control switch is released. 

4. 
Hatch  covers must be capable of bearing the  loads to which they  are  likely  to  be 
subjected:  at  least  75  kg  of  concentrated  load  in  the  case  of  load-supporting  hatch 
covers.  Non-load-supporting  hatch  covers  shall  be  marked  as  such.  Hatch  covers 
designed  to receive  deck  cargo shall  have the permissible  load  in  t/m2 marked  on  them. 
Where  braces  are  needed  to  support  the  maximum  permissible  load  this  shall  be 
indicated  in  an  appropriate  place,  in  which  case  the  relevant  drawings  shall  be  kept  on 
board. 

Article  11.11 

Winches 

1. 
Winches  shall  be  designed  in  such  a way  as to  enable work  to  be  carried  out  in 
complete  safety.  They  shall  be  fitted  with  devices  that  prevent  unintentional  load 
release.  Winches  that  do  not  lock  automatically  shall  be  fitted  with  a  brake  that  is 
adequate to deal with their tractive  force. 

Hand-operated  winches  shall  be  fitted  with  devices  to  prevent  kick-back  of  the 
2. 
crank.  Winches that are both power  and manually  driven shall be designed  in such a way 
that the motive-power  control cannot actuate the manual  control. 

Article  11.12 

Cranes 

1. 
Cranes  shall  be  built  in  accordance  with  the  state  of  the  art.  The  forces  arising 
during their  use  shall  be safely  fed  into  the vessel's  supporting  stmcture;  they  shall  not 
impair its stability. 

100 

2. -  A  manufacturer's  plate  containing  the  following  information  shall  be  affixed  to 
cranes: 

a)  manufacturer's  name and address; 
b)  the CE stamp, together with the year of  manufacture; 
c)  series or type  reference; 
d) where appropriate, serial  number. 

The  maximum  permissible  loadings  shall  be  permanently  marked  in  a  clearly 

3. 
legible manner on cranes. 

Where a crane's safe load does not exceed 2 000 kg it will be sufficient  if the safe  load  at 
the longest beam length is affixed  durably  and in a clearly legible manner to the crane. 

4. 
There  shall  be  devices  to  protect  against  cmshing  or  shearing  accidents.  The 
outer  parts  of  the  crane  shall  leave  a safety  clearance  of  0.5 m upwards  downwards  and 
to the sides, between them  and  all surrounding  objects.  The safety  clearance to the  sides 
is not required  outside the work and access areas. 

It shall be possible to protect mechanical  cranes against unauthorised  use.  It shall 
5. 
only be possible to start these up from  the  crane's  driving position.  The  control  shall  be 
of  the  automatic-return  type  (buttons  without  stops);  their  operating  direction  shall  be 
unambiguously  clear. 

If  the  motive  power  fails  it  shall  not  be  possible  for  the  load  to  drop  unimpeded. 
Unintentional  crane movements shall be prevented. 

It  shall  be  possible  to  stop  any  upward  movement  of  the  hoisting  device  and  any 
exceeding  of  the  safe  load  by  means  of  an  appropriate  restraining  device.  Any 
downward  movement  of  the  hoisting  device  shall  be  stopped  if  there  are  less  than  two 
cable windings on the dmm.  The corresponding  counter movement  shall  still be possible 
after the automatic restraining device has been  actuated. 

The  tensile  strength  of  the  cables  for  mobile  loads  shall  correspond  to  five  times  the 
cable's  permissible  loading.  The  cable  design  shall  be  faultless  and  suitable  for  use  on 
cranes. 

Before  the initial placing in service or after  any return to service following  major 
6. 
alteration  calculations  and  a  load  test  shall  provide  proof  of  adequate  ruggedness  and 
stability. 

Where the safe  load for  a crane does not exceed  2 000 kg the expert may  decide that the 
proof  by  calculation  may  be  replaced  by  a  test  with  a  load  1.25  times  the  safe  load 
conducted  on the longest beam throughout its slewing range. 

The  acceptance  referred  to  in  the  first  or  second  paragraph  shall  be  conducted  by  an 
expert approved by the inspection body. 

Cranes  shall be  checked  regularly  and  in  any  case  at least  every  12 months, by  a 
7. 
competent  person.  That  inspection  shall  include  at  least  one  visual  check  and  one 
operating  check. 

101 

Every ten years, at the latest, after  acceptance the crane shall again be  subjected 

8. 
to acceptance by an expert approved by an inspection body. 

9. 
Cranes with  a safe  load  exceeding  2 000 kg which  tranship the  cargo,  or which 
have been mounted  on board hoisting installations, pontoons or other water  bome  craft 
shall also meet the requirements of one of the Member States. 

10.  At least the following  documents shall be kept on board cranes: 

a) the crane manufacmrer's instmctions for use.  Those instmctions shall contain at least 

the following  information: 

use and operation of the controls; 
maximum permissible safe load as a function  of the boom; 
maximum list and trim of the crane; 
assembly and maintenance instmctions; 
instmctions concerning regular checks; 
general technical data. 

b) certificates  concerning the checks carried out in accordance with Sections 6-8 or 9. 

102 

Chapter 12 

ACCOMMODATION 

Article 12.01 

General 

1. 
and at least for the minimum crew. 

Vessels shall have accommodation  for  the persons  lodging habitually  on board, 

2. 
Accommodation  shall  be  so  designed,  arranged  and  fitted  out  as  to  meet  the 
health, safety  and comfort  needs of those on board.  It shall be of safe  and  easy access 
and insulated against heat and cold. 

3. 
Chapter if the health and safety of those on board are ensured by other means. 

The  inspection  body  may  authorise  derogations  to  the  prescriptions  of  this 

The  inspection  body  shall  indicate  on  the  certificate  any  restrictions  to  the 
4. 
vessel's  operating  mode/entry  into  service resulting  from  the derogations referred  to in 
Section 3. 

Article 12.02 

Special design n quirements 

1. 
It shall be possible to ventilate accommodation  adequately even when the doors 
are  closed;  in  addition,  living  quarters  shall  receive  adequate  daylight  and,  as  far  as 
possible, provide a view out. 

2.  Where there is no deck-level  access to the accommodation  and the difference  in 
level  is  0.30 m  or  more  the  accommodation  shall  be  accessible  by  means  of 
companionways. 

3. 
plane of maximum draught. 

In the fore  section  of  the vessel  no  floor  shall  be more than  1.20 m below the 

Living  and sleeping quarters shall have at least two  exits which  are as far  apart 
4. 
from  each other as possible and which serve as escape routes.  An exit may be designed 
as an emergency exit.  This does not apply to areas with an exit giving directly onto the 
deck or onto  a corridor which serves as an escape route, provided the corridor  has two 
exits at a distance from  each other and giving onto port and starboard.  Emergency exits, 
which may include skylights  and glazing, shall have a clear opening of at least 0.36 m2 
and  a shortest  side no  less  than  0.50 m  and  permit  rapid  evacuation  in  an  emergency. 
Escape routes shall be faced  and insulated with fire-resistant  materials and their usability 
guaranteed at all times by appropriate means such as ladders or mngs. 

Accommodation  shall be protected  against  noise and vibration.  Sound  pressure 

5. 
levels shall not exceed: 

(a) 

(b) 

70 dB(A) in the living quarters; 

60 dB(A)  in  the  sleeping  quarters.  This  provision  does  not  apply  to  vessels 
operating  exclusively  under  mode Kx.  The  operating  mode  restriction  shall  be 
mentioned on the certificate. 

103 

6. 

Headroom  in the accommodation shall be not less than 2.00 m. 

7. 
the sleeping quarters. 

As  a  general  rule,  vessels  shall  have  at  least  one  day-room  partitioned  off  from 

The  free  floor  area  of  the  living  quarters  shall  be not  less  than  2 m2 per  person, 
8. 
and  in  any  event  not  less  than  8 m2  in  total  (not  counting  furniture,  except  tables  and 
chairs). 

9. 
less than 7 m3. 

The  cubic  capacity  of  each  unit  in  the  living  and  sleeping  quarters  shall  be  not 

The volume of air per person  shall be at least 3.5 m3 in the living quarters.  In the 
10. 
sleeping  quarters  it shall be at least  5 m3 for  the first  occupant  and  at least  3 m3  for  each 
additional  occupant  (not  counting volume  of furniture).  Sleeping  cabins  shall,  as far  as 
possible, be intended  for  no more than two persons.  Berths shall be not  less than  0.30 m 
above the floor.  Where one berth is placed  over another, the headroom  above each  berth 
shall be not less than 0.60 m. 

11. 
Doors  shall have  a total  height,  coamings  included,  of  at least  1.90  m and  a  clear 
width  of  at least  0.60 m.  The prescribed  height may be  achieved  by means  of  sliding  or 
hinged  covers  or  flaps.  It  shall  be  possible  to  open  doors  from  either  side.  Coamings 
shall not be more than  0.40 m high,  but  shall nonetheless  comply with  the  provisions  of 
other safety  regulations. 

Companionways  shall be permanently  fixed  and  safely  negotiable.  They  shall  be 

12. 
deemed to be so when: 

(a) 
(b) 
(c) 
(d) 

they are at least 0.60 m wide; 
the tread  is at least 0.15m  deep; 
the steps are non-slip; 
companionways  with  more  than  three  steps  are  fitted  with  at  least  a  handrail  or 
handle. 

Pipes  carrying  dangerous  gases  or  liquids,  and  particularly  those  under  high 
13. 
pressure  in  which  the  slightest  leak  could  pose  a  danger  to  human  beings,  shall  not  be 
located  in  the  accommodation  or  in  corridors  leading  to  the  accommodation.  An 
exception  to this mle  is made for  steam  pipes  and hydraulic  system  pipes, provided  they 
are  fitted  in  metal  sleeves,  and  for  the  pipes  of  liquefied  gas  installations  for  domestic 
purposes. 

Article  12.03 

Sanitary  installations 

1. 
accommodation: 

The  following  sanitary  installations  at  least  shall  be  provided  in  vessels  with 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

one  toilet  per  accommodation  unit  or  per  six  crew  members,  which  it  shall  be 
possible to ventilate with fresh  air, 

one wash  basin with  waste  pipe  and  connected  up  to  hot  and  cold  potable  water 
per accommodation unit or per four  crew members, 

one  shower  or  bath  connected  up 
accommodation unit or per six crew members. 

to  hot  and  cold  potable  water  per 

2. 
The  sanitary  installations  shall  be  in  close  proximity  to  the  accommodation. 
Toilets  shall  not  have  direct  access  to  galleys,  mess  rooms  or  combined  day-
rooms/galleys. 

104 

Toilet compartments shall have a floor  space of at least  1  m2, not less than 0.75  m 
3. 
wide and not less than  1.10m long.  Toilet compartments  in cabins for  no more than  two 
persons may be smaller.  Where a toilet contains  a wash basin and/or shower, the  surface 
area  shall  be  increased  at  least  by  the  surface  area  occupied  by  the  wash  basin  and/or 
shower (or bath). 

Article  12.04 

Galleys 

1. 

2. 

(a) 
(b) 
(c) 
(d) 
(e) 

Galleys may be combined with day-rooms. 

Galleys shall comprise: 

a cooker; 
a sink with waste  connection; 
a supply of potable water; 
a  refrigerator; 
sufficient  storage and working space. 

3. 
The  eating  area  of  combined  galleys/day-rooms  shall  be  large  enough  to 
accommodate the number  of  crew normally using it at the same time.  Seats shall be  not 
less than 0.60 m wide. 

Article  12.05 

Potable  water 

Vessels  with  accommodation  shall  have  one  or  more  potable  water  tanks. 
1. 
Potable  water  tank  filling  apertures  and  potable  water  pipes  shall  be  marked  as  being 
intended  exclusively  for  potable  water.  Potable  water  filler  necks  shall  be  installed 
above the deck. 

2. 

Potable water tanks shall: 

(a) 

be protected  against excessive heating; 

(b) 

have a capacity of at least  150 1 per person normally  living on board,  and  at least 
per member of the minimum  crew; 

(c) 

be made of a material which resists corrosion  and poses no physiological  danger; 

(d) 

have a suitable, lockable opening to enable the inside to be cleaned; 

(e) 

have a water level  indicator; 

(f) 

have ventilation  caps to the open air or which  are fitted  with appropriate  filters. 

3. 
Potable  water  tanks  shall  not  share walls  with  other  tanks.  Potable  water  pipes 
shall  not  pass  through  tanks  containing  other  liquids.  Connections  are  not  permitted 
between  the potable water  supply  system  and  other  pipes.  Pipes  carrying  gas  or  liquids 
other than potable water shall not pass through potable water tanks. 

105 

4. 
Potable water pressure vessels shall operate only on uncontaminated  compressed 
air.  Where  it  is  produced  by  means  of  compressors,  appropriate  air  filters  and  oil 
separators shall be installed  directly  in front  of the pressure vessel unless the water and 
the air are separated by a diaphragm. 

Article 12.06 

Heating and ventilation 

It shall be possible to heat  accommodation  in accordance with- its  intended use. 

1. 
Heating installations shall be appropriate for the weather conditions which may arise. 

2. 
It shall be possible to ventilate the living and sleeping  quarters  adequately  even 
when the doors  are closed.  The inflow  and  evacuation  of  air shall  ensure adequate air 
circulation in all climatic conditions. 

3. 
The  accommodation  shall  be  so  designed  and  arranged  as to  prevent  as  far  as 
possible the penetration of foul air from other areas of the vessel such as engine rooms or 
holds; where forced-air ventilation is used the intake vents shall be so placed as to  satisfy 
the above requirements. 

Article 12.07 

Other accommodation installations 

1. 
Each  crew  member  living  on  board  shall  have  an  individual  berth  and  an 
individual clothes locker fitted with a lock.  The internal measurements of the berth shall 
be not less than 2.00 x 0.90 m. 

Suitable places for  storing and drying work clothes shall be provided,  but not in 

2. 
the sleeping quarters. 

3. 
All accommodation  areas shall be fitted  with electric lighting.  Additional lamps 
using  gas  or  liquid  fuel  may  only  be used  in  the  day-rooms.  Lighting  devices  using 
liquid fuel shall be made of metal and shall bum only fuels with a flash point above 55°C 
or paraffin.  They shall be placed or fixed  so as not to constitute a fire hazard. 

106 

FUEL-FIRED  HEATING, COOKING AND REFRIGERATING  EQUIPMENT 

Chapter  13 

Article  13.01 

General 

Heating, cooking and refrigeration  equipment mnning on liquefied  gas shall  meet 

1. 
the requirements of Chapter  14 of this Annex. 

2. 
Heating,  cooking  and refrigeration  equipment,  together with  its accessories,  shall 
be so designed  and  installed  that  it is not dangerous  even  in the event of overheating.  It 
shall be so installed that it cannot overturn or be moved  accidentally. 

3. 
The  equipment  referred  to  in  Section 2  shall  not  be  installed  in  areas  in  which 
substances  with  a  flash  point  below  55°C  are  used  or  stored.  No  flues  from  these 
installations may pass through such areas. 

4. 

The intake of air necessary for  combustion shall be ensured. 

5. 
Heating appliances shall be securely connected to flues, which  shall be fitted  with 
suitable  cowls  or  devices  affording  protection* against the wind.  They  shall  be  disposed 
in such a manner as to permit cleaning. 

Article  13.02 

Use of liquid fuels,  oil-fired  equipment 

Equipment  which  uses  liquid  fuel  may  be  operated  only  with  fuels  whose  flash 

1. 
point is above 55°C. 

2. 
By  way  of  derogation  from  Section  1,  cooking  appliances  and  heating  and 
refrigeration  appliances  fitted  with  burners  with  wicks  and  mnning  on  commercial 
paraffin  may  be permitted  in the  accommodation  and  wheelhouse  provided  the  capacity 
of the fuel  tank does not exceed  12 litres. 

3. 

Appliances fitted  with burners with wicks shall be: 

(a) 

fitted  with  a metal fuel  tank whose filling  aperture may be locked  and which  has 
no  soft-solder  joints  below  the maximum  filling  level,  and  shall  be  designed  and 
installed  in  such  a  way  that  the  fuel  tank  cannot  be  opened  or  emptied 
accidentally; 

(b) 

capable of being lit without the aid of another liquid  fuel; 

(c) 

so installed  as to ensure the safe evacuation  of combustion gases. 

107 

Article  13.03 

Vaporising oil burner stoves and vaporising oil burner heating  appliances 

Vaporising oil burner stoves and vaporising oil burner heating appliances  shall be 

1. 
built in accordance with the state of the art. 

2. 
Where  a vaporising  oil  burner  stove or  a vaporising  oil burner heating  appliance 
is  installed  in  an  engine  room,  the  air  supply  to  the  heating  appliance  and  the  engines 
shall be so  designed  that the heating  appliance  and the  engines  can  operate properly  and 
safely  independently  of  one  another.  Where  necessary,  there  shall  be  a  separate  air 
supply.  The  equipment  shall  be  installed  in  such  a way  that  no  flame  from  the  burner 
can reach other parts of the engine room installations. 

Article  13.04 

Vaporising oil burner stoves 

1. 
It shall be possible to light vaporising oil burner stoves without the aid of  another 
combustible liquid.  They shall be fixed  over a metal drip pan which encompasses  all the 
fuel-carrying  parts and is at least 20 mm high and has a capacity of at least two litres. 

2. 
For  vaporising  oil  burner  stoves  installed  in  an  engine  room,  the  metal  drip  pan 
prescribed  in  Section  1 shall be at least 200 mm  deep.  The lower  edge of the vaporising 
burner  shall  be  located  above  the  edge  of  the  drip  pan.  In  addition,  the  drip  pan  shall 
extend  at least  100 mm  above the  floor. 

3. 
Vaporising  oil burner  stoves  shall be fitted  with  a suitable regulator  which,  at  all 
settings,  ensures  a virtually  constant  flow  of  fuel  to  the  burner  and  which  prevents  any 
fuel  leak should the flame go out.  Regulators shall be considered suitable which  function 
even  when  shaken  or  when  tilted  by  up  to  12°  and  which,  in  addition  to  a  level-
regulating float,  have 

(a) 

(b) 

a second  float  which  works  safely  and reliably  to  close off  the fuel  supply  when 
the permitted  level is exceeded, or 

an  overflow  pipe  if  the  drip  pan  has  sufficient  capacity  to  accommodate  the 
contents of the fuel  tank. 

4. 

Where the fuel  tank of a vaporising oil burner stove is installed  separately 

(a) 

the  drop  between  the tank  and  the burner  feed  may not  exceed  that  laid  down  in 
the manufacturer's  operating  instmctions; 

(b) 

it shall be so installed  as to be protected from  unacceptable heating; 

(c) 

it shall be possible to interrupt the fuel  supply from  the deck. 

The  flues  of vaporising  oil  burner  stoves  shall  be  fitted  with  a device  to  prevent 

5. 
draught  inversion. 

108 

Article  13.05 

Vaporising oil burner heating  appliances 

Vaporising  oil  burner  heating  appliances  shall  in  particular  meet  the  following 

requirements: 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

(e) 

adequate ventilation of the burner shall be ensured before the fuel  is supplied; 

the fuel  supply shall be regulated by a thermostat; 

the fuel  shall be ignited by an electric device or by a pilot  flame; 

a flame monitoring device shall cut off the fuel  supply when the flame  goes out; 

the  main  switch  shall  be  placed  at  an  easily  accessible  point  outside  the 
installation room. 

Article  13.06 

Forced-air  heating  appliances 

Forced-air  heating  appliances  consisting  of  a combustion  chamber  around  which 
the  heating  air  is  conducted  under  pressure  to  a  distribution  system  or  to  an  area  shall 
meet the following  requirements: 

' 

(a) 

(b) 

If the  fuel  is vaporised  under  pressure  the  combustion  air  shall  be  supplied  by  a 
blower. 

The  combustion  chamber  shall  be  well  ventilated  before  the  burner  may  be  lit. 
This  ventilation  may  be  considered  complete  when  the  combustion  air  blower 
continues to operate after  the flame has gone out. 

(c) 

The fuel  supply shall be automatically  cut  if: 

the fire goes out; 
the supply of combustion  air is no longer adequate; 
the heated  air exceeds a previously  set temperature, or 
the electricity supply is no longer reaching the safety  devices. 

In  the  above  cases  the  fuel  supply  shall  not  be  reestablished  automatically  after 
being cut  off. 

(d) 

It shall be possible to  switch  off  the combustion  air and  heating  air blowers  from 
outside the areas to be heated. 

(e)  Where heating  air is drawn from  outside, the intake vents  shall  as far  as  possible 
be located well above the deck.  They shall be installed  in such  a manner that rain 
and spray cannot get in. 

(f) 

(g) 

(h) 

(i) 

Heating air pipes shall be made of metal. 

It shall not be possible to close the heating air outlet apertures  completely. 

It shall not be possible for  any leaking fuel  to reach the heating air pipes. 

It shall  not be possible  for  forced-air  heating  appliances  to  draw  their  heating  air 
from  an engine room. 

109 

Article 13.07 

Solid fuel heating 

Solid fuel  heating  appliances  shall be placed on a metal plate with raised  edges 

1. 
such that no burning fuel or hot cinders fall outside the plate. 

This requirement does not apply to appliances installed in compartments built of 

fire-resistant materials and intended solely to house boilers. 

Solid fuel boilers shall be fitted with thermostatic controls to regulate the flow of 

2. 
combustion air. 

A means by which  cinders can be quickly doused shall be placed  in the vicinity 

3. 
of each heating appliance. 

110 

Chapter 14 

LIQUEFIED GAS  INSTALLATIONS 
FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES 

Article  14.01 

General 

1. 
Liquefied  gas installations  consist  essentially  of  a supply  unit  comprising  one  or 
more  gas  receptacles,  and  of  one  or  more  reducing  valves,  a  distribution  system  and  a 
number of gas-consuming appliances. 

Spare and empty receptacles not in the supply unit shall not be considered  part  of 

the installation.  Article  14.05 is applicable to them. 

2. 

Installations may be operated  only with commercial propane. 

Article  14.02 

Installations 

Liquefied  gas  installations  shall be suitable throughout  for  use with  propane  and 

1. 
shall be built and installed in accordance with the state of the art. 

2. 
A  liquefied  gas  installation  may  be  used  only  for  domestic  purposes  in  the 
accommodation  and  the  wheelhouse,  and  for  corresponding  purposes  on  passenger 
vessels. 

There may  be  a number  of  separate  installations  on board.  A  single  installation 

3. 
may not be used to serve accommodation  areas separated by a hold or a fixed  tank. 

4. 

No part of a liquefied  gas installation shall be located in the engine room. 

Article  14.03 

Receptacles 

1. 
Only receptacles with  an approved  content of between  5 and 35 kg  are permitted. 
In the case of passenger vessels, the  inspection body  may  approve the use  of  receptacles 
with a larger  content. 

Receptacles shall satisfy  the requirements  in force  in one of the Member  States of 

2. 
the Community. 

They  shall  bear  the  official  stamp  certifying  that  they  have  been  accepted 

following  the statutory tests. 

111 

Article  14.04 

Location  and arrangement  of supply  units 

1. 
Supply units shall be installed  on deck in a freestanding  or wall  cupboard  located 
outside  the  accommodation  area  in  a  position  such  that  it  does  not  interfere  with 
movement  on  board.  They  shall  not,  however,  be  installed  against  the  fore  or  aft 
bulwark  plating.  The  cupboard  may  be  a  wall  cupboard  set  into  the  superstmcture 
provided  that  it  is  gastight  and  can  only  be  opened  from  outside  the  superstmcture.  It 
shall be so located that the distribution pipes leading to the gas consumption points  are as 
short as possible. 

No  more  receptacles  may  be  in  operation  simultaneously  than  are  necessary  for 
the  functioning  of  the  installation.  Several  receptacles  may  be  in  operation  only  if  an 
automatic  reversing  coupler  is  used.  Up  to  four  receptacles  may  be  in  operation  per 
installation.  The  number  of  receptacles  on board,  including  spare  receptacles,  shall  not 
exceed six per  installation. 

Up  to  six  receptacles  may  be  in  operation  on  passenger  vessels  with  galleys  or 
canteens  for  passengers.  The  number  of  receptacles  on  board,  including  spare 
receptacles, shall not exceed nine per installation. 

The  pressure  reducer,  or  in  the  case  of  two-stage  reduction  the  first  pressure 

reducer,  shall be fitted  to a wall in the same cupboard  as the receptacles. 

2. 
Supply  units  shall  be  so  installed  that  any  leaking  gas  can  escape  from  the 
cupboard  into the open without  any risk of it penetrating  inside the vessel  or coming into 
contact with a source of ignition. 

3. 
Cupboards  shall be  constructed  of fire-resistant  materials  and  shall be  adequately 
ventilated by  apertures in the top  and bottom.  Receptacles  shall be placed upright  in the 
cupboards  in such a way that they  cannot be overturned. 

Cupboards  shall  be  so  built  and  placed  that  the  temperature  of  the  receptacles 

4. 
cannot exceed 50°C. 

The  words  "liquefied  gas"  and  a  "no  smoking"  symbol  at  least  100 mm  in 

5. 
diameter shall be affixed  to the outer wall of the cupboard. 

Article  14.05 

Spare and empty receptacles 

Spare  and  empty  receptacles  not  located  in  the  supply  unit  shall  be  stored  outside  the 
accommodation  area  and  the  wheelhouse  in  a  cupboard  built  in  accordance  with 
Article  14.04. 

Article  14.06 

Pressure  reducers 

Gas-consuming  appliances  may  be  connected  to  receptacles  only  through  a 
1. 
distribution  system  fitted  with  one  or  more  reducing  valves  to  bring  the  gas  pressure 
down to the utilisation pressure.  The pressure may be reduced  in one or two  stages.  All 
reducing  valves  shall  be  set  permanently  at  a  pressure  determined  in  accordance  with 
Article  14.07. 

112 

2. 
The final  pressure reducers  shall be either fitted  with or immediately  followed  by 
a  device  to  protect  the  pipe  automatically  against  excess  pressure  in  the  event  of  a 
malfunctioning  of the reducing valve.  It shall be ensured that in the  event of  a breach  in 
the  airtight  protection  device  any  leaking  gas  can  escape  into  the  open  without  any  risk 
of  it  penetrating  inside  the  vessel  or  coming  into  contact  with  a  source  of  ignition;  if 
necessary,  a special pipe shall be fitted  for this purpose . 

3. 

The protection  devices and vents shall be protected  against the entry of water. 

Article  14.07 

Pressure 

1. 
than 2.5 bar above atmospheric pressure. 

Where two-stage reducing  systems  are used,  the mean pressure  shall be not  more 

2. 
0.05 bar above atmospheric pressure, with a tolerance of  10 %. 

The  pressure  at the  outlet  from  the  last pressure  reducer  shall  be  not  more  than 

Article  14.08 

Piping  and flexible  tubes 

1. 

Pipes shall consist of fixed  steel or copper tubing. 

However,  pipes  connecting  with  the  receptacles  shall  be  high-pressure  flexible 
tubes  or  spiral  tubes  suitable  for  propane.  Gas-consuming  appliances  may,  if  not 
installed  in  a  fixed  manner,  be  connected  by  means  of  suitable  flexible  tubes  not  more 
than  1  m long. 

Pipes shall be able to withstand  any stresses  or corrosive  action which  may  occur 
2. 
under  normal operating  conditions  on board  and their  characteristics  and  layout  shall  be 
such  that  they  ensure  a  satisfactory  flow  of  gas  at  the  appropriate  pressure  to  the  gas-
consuming  appliances. 

Pipes shall have as few joints  as possible.  Both pipes  and joints  shall be  gastight 
3. 
and  shall  remain  gastight  despite  any  vibration  or  expansion  to  which  they  may  be 
subjected. 

Pipes  shall  be  readily  accessible,  properly  fixed  and  protected  at  every  point 
4. 
where  they  might  be  subject  to  impact  or  friction,  particularly  where  they  pass  through 
steel bulkheads or metal  walls 

The entire outer surface  of steel pipes shall be treated against  corrosion. 

5. 
Flexible  pipes  and  their joints  shall be  able to withstand  any  stresses  which  may 
occur  under  normal  operating  conditions  on  board.  They  shall  be  unencumbered  and 
fitted  in  such  a  way  that  they  cannot  be  heated  excessively  and  can  be  inspected  over 
their entire length. 

Article  14.09 

Distribution  system 

It shall  be possible to  shut off  the  entire  distribution  system  by  means  of  a valve 

1. 
which is at all times easily  and rapidly  accessible. 

113 

Each  gas-consuming  appliance. shall  be  supplied  by  a  separate  branch  of  the 

2. 
distribution system, and each branch must be controlled by a separate closing device, 

3. 
from impact. 

Valves  shall be fitted  at  points  where they  are protected  from  the weather  and 

An inspection joint shall be fitted  after each pressure reducer.  It shall be ensured 
4. 
using a closing device that in pressure tests the pressure reducer is not exposed to the test 
pressure. 

Article 14.10 

Gas-consuming appliances and their installation 

1. 
The  only  appliances  that  may  be  installed  are  propane-consuming  appliances 
approved in one of the Member States and equipped with devices that effectively  prevent 
the escape of gas in the event of either the flame or the pilot light being extinguished. 

2. 
Appliances  shall  be  so  placed  and  connected  that  they  cannot  overturn  or  be 
accidentally  moved  and as to  avoid  any risk  of  accidental wrenching  of the connecting 
pipes. 

Heating  and water-heating  appliances  and  refrigerators  shall  be  connected  to  a 

3. 
duct for evacuating combustion gases into the open air. 

The installation of gas-consuming appliances in the wheelhouse is permitted only 
4. 
if the wheelhouse is so constmcted that no leaking gas can escape into the lower parts of 
the craft, in particular through the control mns leading to the engine room. 

5. 
combustion takes place independently of the air in the quarters. 

Gas-consuming  appliances  may  be  installed  in  sleeping  quarters  only  if 

6. 
in which they are located shall be installed in rooms which are sufficiently  large. 

Gas-consuming  appliances in which combustion  depends on the air in the rooms 

Article 14.11 

Ventilation and evacuation of combustion gases 

In rooms containing gas-consuming  appliances in which combustion  depends on 
1. 
the ambient air, fresh  air shall be supplied and combustion gases evacuated by means of 
ventilation apertures of adequate dimensions, with a clear section of at least  150 cm2 per 
aperture. 

Ventilation  apertures  shall not have any  closing  device and shall not give on to 

2. 
sleeping quarters. 

3. 
Evacuation  devices  shall  be  so  designed  as  to  ensure  the  safe  evacuation  of 
combustion  gases.  They  shall  be  reliable  in  operation  and  made  of  non-flammable 
materials.  Their operation shall not be affected  by the ventilators. 

114 

Article  14.12 

Instructions for  use and safety 

A  notice  on  the  use  of  the  installation  shall  be  affixed  on  board  in  a  suitable  place.  It 
shall bear the following  instmctions: 

"The taps  of receptacles  not connected  to the distribution  system  must  be  closed, 
even if the receptacles are presumed  empty." 

"Flexible pipes must be replaced  as soon as their condition so requires." 

"All  gas-consuming  appliances  must  remain  connected  unless  the  corresponding 
connecting pipes are sealed." 

Article  14.13 

Acceptance 

Before  a liquefied  gas  installation  is used,  after  any modification  or repair  and  on  every 
renewal  of  the  attestation  referred  to  in  Article  14.15,  the whole  of  the  said  installation 
must be accepted  by an expert  approved  by the inspection  body.  During this  acceptance 
the  expert  shall  verify  whether  the  installation  conforms  to  the  requirements  of  this 
chapter.  He shall submit an acceptance report to the inspection body. 

Article  14.14 

Tests and trials 

Tests on the installation shall be carried out as follows: 

Medium-pressure  pipes  between  the  closing  device,  referred  to  in  Article  14.09, 
1. 
Section 4,  of  the  first  reducing  device  and  the  valves  fitted  before  the  fmal  pressure 
reducer: 

(a) 

(b) 

strength  test,  carried  out  with  air,  an  inert  gas  or  a  liquid  at  a  pressure  20  bar 
above atmospheric pressure; 

gastightness  test,  carried  out with  air  or  an  inert  gas  at  a pressure  3.5  bar  above 
atmospheric pressure. 

2. 
Pipes  at  the  utilisation  pressure  between  the  closing  device,  referred  to  in 
Article  14.09,  Section 4,  of  the single pressure  reducer  or the final  pressure  reducer  and 
the valves fitted  before the gas-consuming  appliances: 

leak  test,  carried  out  with  air  or  an  inert  gas  at  a  pressure  of  1  bar  above 

atmospheric pressure. 

3. 
Pipes  situated  between  the closing  device, referred  to  in Article  14.09,  Section 4, 
of  the  single  pressure  reducer  or  the  fmal  pressure  reducer  and  the  controls  of  the  gas-
consuming  appliance: 

leak test at a pressure of 0.15 bar above atmospheric pressure. 

4. 
In the tests referred  to in Sections  1(b), 2 and  3, the pipes  are deemed  gastight  if, 
after  sufficient  time to allow for normal balancing, no fall  in the test pressure is observed 
during the following  10 minutes. 

115 

Receptacle  connectors,  piping  and  other  fittings  subjected  to  the  pressure  in  the 

5. 
receptacles, and joints between the reducing valve and the distribution pipe: 

leak test, carried out with a foaming  substance, at the operating pressure. 

All  gas-consuming  appliances  shall  be  brought  into  service  and  tested  at  the 
6. 
nominal  pressure  to  ensure  that  combustion  is  satisfactory  with  the  regulating  knobs  in 
the different  positions. 

Flame failure  devices shall be checked to ensure that they operate  satisfactorily. 

7. 
After  the test referred  to  in  Section 6,  it  shall  be verified,  in respect  of  each gas-
consuming  appliance  connected  to  a  flue,  whether,  after  five  minutes'  operation  at  the 
nominal  pressure,  with  windows  and  doors  closed  and  the  ventilation  devices  in 
operation,  any combustion gases are escaping through the damper. 

If  there  is  a  more  than  momentary  escape  of  such  gases,  the  cause  shall 
immediately be detected  and remedied.  The appliance shall not be approved  for use until 
all defects  have been  eliminated. 

Article  14.15 

Attestation 

1. 
installations  conform  to the requirements of this  Chapter. 

The  certificate  shall  include  an  attestation  to  the  effect  that  all  liquefied  gas 

The  attestation  will  be  issued  by  the  inspection  body  following  the  acceptance 

2. 
referred  to in Article  14.13. 

The  attestation  shall  be valid  for  a period  not  exceeding  three  years.  It  may  be 

3. 
renewed only after  a further  acceptance carried out in accordance with Article  14.13. 

Exceptionally,  where  the  owner  of  a  vessel  or  his  representative  submits  a 
reasoned  request,  the  inspection  body  may  extend  the  validity  of  the  attestation  for  not 
more than three months without  carrying out the  acceptance referred  to in Article  14.13. 
Such extension must be entered  in the  certificate. 

116 

Chapter 15 

SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR PASSENGER  VESSELS 

Article  15.01 

General 

1. 

Articles 4.01 to 4.04 and 8.06,  Section 7 are not applicable. 

2. 
passengers. 

Vessels  with  no  motive  power  of  their  own  are  not  authorised  to  carry 

3. 
In the case of vessels with  a length  LF of 25 m or more, buoyancy  in the event of 
a  leak  shall  be  demonstrated  in  accordance  with  Article  15.02  for  all  possible  loading 
situations. 

4. 

On all decks, passenger spaces shall be situated  aft of the collision bulkhead. 

5. 
the requirements  of Articles  15.07 and  15.09. 

Spaces intended  for the accommodation  of on-board  staff  shall by  analogy  satisfy 

6. 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

Notwithstanding  Article  3.02,  Section  1(b),  the  minimum  thickness  t^  of 
bottom,  bilge  and  side  plating  of  passenger  vessels  shall  be  the  greater  of  the 
values obtained  as follows: 

timind =  0.006-aWT[mm] 
t2mind =  f - 0 - 5 5 W LF[ m m] 

where: 

f =  1  + 0.0013 • (a - 500), a being 400 mm or more, 
a =  distance between  longitudinal  or transverse  ribs  in  [mm]; where  the  distance 
between ribs is less than 400 mm the value a = 400 mm will be used. 

The  greater  value  produced  by  the  formulae  shall  be  taken  as  the  minimum 
thickness.  Plates  shall  be  replaced  when  the thickness  of bottom  or  side  plating 
no  longer  attains  the  minimum  value  determined  according  to  the  above 
requirement. 

Plate  thickness  may  be  less  than  the  minimum  value  produced  by  the  formulae 
where  the  permissible  value  has  been  determined  and  certified  on  the  basis  of 
calculated  evidence of sufficient  hull strength 

However  the minimum  thickness  shall not be less than  3 mm  at any  point  on  the 
hull. 

Article  15.02 

Basic requirements for  subdivision of vessels 

1. 
The  distribution  of  bulkheads  shall  be  such  that,  if  any  watertight  compartment 
becomes  flooded,  the  hull  does  not  sink  below  the  margin  line  and  the  requirements  of 
Article  15.04, Section  8, are met. 

117 

Watertight  glazing  may  be  installed  below  the  margin  line  on  condition  that  it 
2. 
cannot  be  opened,  is  sufficiently  strong  and  meets  the  requirements  of  Article  15.07, 
Section 7. 

3. 
event of a leak. 

Structural  specifications  shall  be taken  into  account  in  calculating  stability  in  the 

In general, calculations should be based on a permeability  factor  of  95%. 

If  it  is  established  by  calculation 

that  the  average  permeability  of  any 
compartment  is less than  95%, the  calculated  permeability  may  be used  instead.  In  such 
calculations, the following minimum values shall, however, be observed: 

Passenger and crew areas 

Engine rooms (including boiler rooms) 

Cargo, luggage and provisions compartments 

Double bottoms, fuel  bunkers and other tanks  according 
to whether,  according to their intended use, they are to be 
deemed full  or empty, the vessel floating  at the plane 
of maximum draught 

95% 

85%» 

75% 

0 or 95% 

4. 
Between the collision  bulkhead  and the stem  bulkhead,  only those  compartments 
having  a length  of  at least  0.10 LF, but not  less than  4 m,  shall be  considered  watertight 
compartments  for  the  purposes  of  Section  1  above.  The  inspection  body  may  allow 
minor exceptions to this mle. 

Where  a  watertight  compartment  is  longer  than  required  by  the  foregoing 
provisions  and  is  subdivided  so  as  to  form  watertight  spaces  which  also  meet  the 
minimum  length  requirement,  those  spaces  may  be  taken  into  account  in  calculating 
stability  in the event of a leak. 

The length of the first  compartment aft of the collision bulkhead  may be less than 
0.10 LF or 4 m.  In such cases, the fore peak  and the  adjacent  compartment  shall be taken 
as  jointly  floodable  in  the  stability  calculation.  The  distance  between  the  forward 
perpendicular  and  the  aft  transverse  bulkhead  bounding  this  compartment  may  not, 
however,  be less than 0.10 LF or 4 m. 

The  distance between  the  collision  bulkhead  and  the forward  perpendicular  shall 

be at least 0.04 LF and not more than 0.04 LF + 2 m. 

5. 
Where  a passenger  vessel  has  longitudinal  watertight  subdivisions,  asymmetries 
between  the  collision  bulkhead  and  the  rear  bulkhead  shall  be  taken  into  account  as 
follows: 

(a) 

(b) 

provided  that the longitudinal  bulkheads  are  at  least  1/5  BF from  the  skin  plating 
at  the  maximum  loaded  draft  line  and  at  least  1/6  BF,  but  not  less  than  1.50  m, 
from  each other, the stability calculation  shall allow for the individual flooding  of 
compartments A, B and C and the simultaneous  flooding  of  compartments  A + B 
and B + C (see fig.  1); 

if mid-compartment  B has  a watertight  deck  more  than  0.50  m  from  the  bottom 
of  the vessel  it  is not necessary  to allow  for  flooding  of  compartment  D  situated 
above that  deck (see fig.  2).  The conditions  set out  above regarding  longitudinal 
bulkheads shall  apply. 

118 

Figure 1. 

Figure 2. 

A 

B 

j 

C 

A 

D 

| 

C 

a 

4 

H 

j  b 

c 

1  4 

> 

B 

!  d 

! 

'  r 

. 

a 

!  b 

c 

a = at least  1/5 BF 
b = at least  1/6 BF, but not less than 1.50 m 
c = at least 1/5 BF. 
d = at least 0.50 m. 

Article  15.03 

Transverse bulkheads 

1. 
bulkheads deriving from the subdivision calculation shall be required. 

In addition to the bulkheads prescribed  in Article 3.03,  Section  1, the transverse 

The prescribed transverse bulkheads  shall be watertight  and be  carried up to the 
bulkhead deck. Where there is no bulkhead deck these bulkheads shall extend to a height 
at least 20 cm above the margin line.  The requirements of Article  15.04,  Section 8 shall 
be met. 

Passenger  spaces  and  the  on-board  staffs  quarters  shall  be  separated  from  the 

engine rooms and boiler rooms by gastight bulkheads. 

2. 
The  number  of  openings  in  watertight  transverse  bulkheads  as  defined  in 
Section 1  above shall be as small  as the type of construction and normal operation of the 
vessel permit.  Openings and passageways shall not adversely affect the watertightness  of 
bulkheads. 

Collision bulkheads shall have neither openings nor doors. 

The  bulkheads  separating  engine  rooms  from  passenger  spaces  or  the  on-board 

staffs  quarters shall have no doors. 

3. 
Doors  in  watertight  bulkheads  which  are  manually  operated  and  not  remote 
controlled  shall  be  authorised  only  in  areas  not  accessible  to  passengers.  They  shall 
remain  closed  at all  times  and may be opened  only  temporarily to  allow  access.  Rapid 
and  safe  locking  shall  be  ensured  by  appropriate  devices.  The  words  "Close  door 
immediately  after use" shall appear on both sides of such doors. 

119 

Notwithstanding  the  first  sentence  above  manually  operated  watertight  bulkhead  doors 
shall be permitted  in passenger areas  if: 

(a)  the length LF of the craft  does not exceed 40 m; 

(b)  the number of passengers  does not exceed LF; 

(c)  the vessel has only one deck; 

(d)  the  doors  are  accessible  directly  from  the  deck  and  are  not  more  than  10  m  away 

from  access to the deck; 

(?)  the lower edge of the door is at least 30 cm above the floor  of the passenger  area; 

(f) 

the two adjacent  compartments  are equipped with a bilge level alarm  system. 

4. 
It  shall  be  possible  to  close  bulkhead  doors  which  remain  open  for  prolonged 
periods  on  the  spot  from  either  side  and  from  an  easily  accessible  place  above  the 
bulkhead  deck.  Once a door has been remotely  closed,  it shall be possible  to reopen  and 
close it safely  on the spot. Closure  shall not be impeded  by  carpeting,  foot  rails  or  other 
obstructions. 

The  duration  of  the  remote  closing  operation  shall  be  not  less  than  30  seconds 
and  not  more  than  60  seconds.  During  the  operation,  an  automatic  alarm  signal  shall 
sound  close to the  door.  It  shall  be  ensured  that the  door  control  and  alarm  also  operate 
independently  of  the  supply  system.  At  the  point  where  the  remote  control  operation  is 
carried out, there shall be a device to indicate whether the door is open or closed. 

5. 
Bulkhead  doors  and their opening  and  closing  devices  shall be located  in  an  area 
bounded  on the outside by a vertical  plane at a distance of  1/5  of the breadth  BF  parallel 
to the side plating  at the maximum  loaded  draft  line.  The wheelhouse  shall  be  equipped 
with  a visual  alarm  system which  acts  as a monitoring  device  and  is  activated  whenever 
the bulkhead  door is opened. 

Open-ended  piping and ventilation  ducts shall be so installed  that,  in the event of 
6. 
a  leak,  no  other  spaces  or  tanks  are flooded.  If  several  compartments  are  connected  by 
piping  or  ventilation  ducts,  such  piping  and  ducts  shall  open  into  an  appropriate  place 
above  the  waterline  corresponding  to the worst  possible  flooding.  Where  this  is  not  the 
case,  transverse  bulkheads  shall  be  fitted  with  remote  closing  devices  operated  from 
above the bulkhead  deck. 

Piping which  has no  open orifice  in  a compartment  shall  be  considered  intact  in 
the  event  of  any  damage  to  that  compartment,  provided  that  it  is within  the  safety  area 
defmed  in Section  5 above and  is more than 0.50 m from  the bottom. 

7. 
Where  openings  and  doors such  as those referred  to  in  Sections 2 to  6 above  are 
authorised,  the  following  operating  instmctions  shall  be  entered  on  the  inspection 
certificate: 

"The crew shall  be  instructed  that,  in the event of danger,  all openings  and  doors 

in watertight bulkheads  are to be hermetically  closed without delay." 

Transverse  bulkheads  may  be  recessed  provided  that  all  recess  points  are  within 

8. 
the safety  area defined  in Section  5 above. 

120 

Article  15.04 

Intact stability  and stability  in the event of a leak 

1. 
The  applicant  shall  show  that  the  intact  stability  of  the  vessel  is  adequate  by 
calculation  based  on  the  results  of a  lateral  stability  test  and,  if  the  inspection  body  so 
requests, of a turning test. 

2. 
Proof  of  adequate  intact  stability  by  calculation  shall  be  deemed  to  be  furnished 
if,  when  fully  rigged,  with  fuel  bunkers,  water  tanks  and  waste  water  collection  tanks 
half  filled,  while  maintaining  a  residual  freeboard  and  residual  safety  clearance 
conforming  to Section 7 below,  and under the simultaneous  effects  of: 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

a lateral displacement  of persons under the conditions set out in Section 4 below; 

wind pressure as defined  in Section  5 below; 

the  centrifugal  force  resulting  from  the turning  of  the  craft  under  the  conditions 
set out in Section 6 below, 

the  heel  of  the  vessel  does  not  exceed  12°.  Under  the  sole  effect  of  lateral 

displacement of persons, this angle shall not exceed  10°. 

The  inspection  body  may  require  the  calculation  also  to  be  made  for  other 

desrees of filling  of fuel  bunkers and tanks. 

'•o 

For  vessels  with  a  length  LF  of  less  than  25  m,  the  proof  of  adequate  intact 
3. 
stability  by  calculation  required  in  Section 2  above  may  be  replaced  by  a load  test  with 
the  weight  of  half  the  authorised  maximum  number  of  passengers  and  the  most 
unfavourable  loading  of  fuel  bunkers  and  water  tanks.  This weight  shall  be  distributed 
from  the side plating over the free  deck area for  passenger use at a ratio of 3% passengers 
per  m2.  During  this  test,  the  angle  of  heel  shall  not  exceed  7°  and  the  remaining 
freeboard  and safety  clearance  shall not be less than 0.05B  + 0.20 m and  0.05B + 0.10 m 
respectively 

4. 
The  moment  resulting  from  the  lateral  displacement  of  persons  Mp shall  be  the 
sum of the moments for  each  deck accessible to passengers.  These shall be calculated  as 
follows: 

(a) 

For free  decks: 

Mpn = cp- b -P 

[kNm] 

where 

cp - coefficient  (cp =1.5)  [m/s2]; 
b = the greatest usable width of the deck measured  at a height of 0.50 m; 
P = the total mass of persons permitted  on the deck in question, in t. 

(b) 

For deck space occupied  by fixed  installations: 

In  calculating  the  lateral  displacement  of  persons  on  decks  partly  occupied  by 
fixed  installations,  such  as  benches,  tables,  dinghies  or  small  shelters,  a  load  of  33?4 
passengers  per  m2 of free  deck  area shall be used;  for  benches,  an  area  0.50  m wide  and 
0.75 m long shall be allowed  per  passenger. 

The calculation  shall be made for  displacement to starboard  and to port. 

121 

For vessels with more than one deck,  the distribution  of the total weight of persons  shall 
be  the  most  unfavourable  from  the  point  of  view  of  stability.  Cabins,  if  any,  shall  be 
assumed to be unoccupied for the calculation of lateral displacement of persons. 

The centre of gravity of a person shall be assumed to be at a height of  1 m  above 

the  lowest  point  of  the  deck  at  V2  LF without  allowing  for  the  sheer  or  curvature  of  the 
deck and assuming a mass of 75 kg per passenger. 

5. 

The moment resulting from  the wind pressure Mw shall be calculated  as follows: 

Mw = pw-S(lv v+ 

[kNm]. 

_I_) 
•  2 

where 

pw = specific wind pressure of 0.1 kN/m2; 
S = lateral surface  area of the vessel above the plane of maximum  draught, in m2; 
lw =  distance  between  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  lateral  surface  area  S  and  the 
plane of maximum  draught,  in m. 

6. 
vessel shall be calculated  as follows: 

The  moment  resulting  from  the  centrifugal  force  exerted  by  the  mrning  of  the 

A4 = Ctr  • IL 

LP 

(KG -JL) 

[kNm]. 

2 

where 

Qr = a coefficient  (C* = 5) [m2/s2]; 

KG = distance between the centre of gravity and the upper side of the keel in m. 

Where  the  angle  of  heel  during  turning  is  verified  by  a  test  the  value  so 
determined may be used  in the calculation.  The test shall be performed  with the craft  at 
half maximum  speed fully  loaded  and on the smallest turning radius possible under  these 
conditions. 

With  the  vessel  at  the  angle  of  heel  resulting  from  the  forces  referred  to  in 

7. 
Section 2(a) to (c) the remaining freeboard  must be not less than 0.20 m. 

For  vessels  whose  side  glazing  can  be  opened  or  whose  sides  contain  other 
openings  not  guaranteed  to  be  watertight  a  safety  clearance  of  at  least  0.10  m  shall  be 
maintained. 

8. 
Proof  by  calculation  of  adequate  stability  in the  event  of  a leak  shall  be  deemed 
to have been furnished  if at all the intermediate  stages  and the final  stage of flooding  the 
righting moment MR defined  by: 

MR = CR-  MG  ^-sincp-D 

[kNm] 

is greater than the heeling moment Mh = 0.2 Mp [kNm]. 

where 

CR 

= coefficient  (CR=  10)  [m/s2]; 

122 

MG  res 

= reduced  metacentric  height in the flooded  state in m; ' 

q) 
= the smaller  of the  following  two angles:  the angle  at which  the 
main  opening  of a non-flooded  compartment  begins  to be flooded  or the angle  at 
which the bulkhead  deck  begins to be  flooded; 

ML 
referred  to in Section  4. 

=  moment  resulting  from  the  lateral  displacement  of  persons 

Article 15.05 

Calculation  of  the  number  of passengers  on the basis  of  free  deck  area 

1. 
set the authorised  maximum  number of passengers as follows: 

If  Articles  15.04  and  15.06  have  been  complied  with,  the  inspection  body  shall 

(a) 

The  calculation  shall  be based  on the sum total  free  deck  area normally  reserved 
on board to accommodate passengers. 

However,  the  deck  areas  of  cabins  and  toilet  compartments  and  of  areas  used 
permanently  or temporarily  for  the  operation  of  the vessel,  even  if  accessible  to 
passengers,  shall  not  be  included  in  the  calculation.  Moreover,  areas  located 
below  the  main  deck  shall  not  be  taken  into  consideration.  However,  areas  let 
into  the  main  deck  and  including  large  glazing  above  it  may  be  included  in  the 
calculation. 

(b) 

The  following  shall  be  subtracted  from  the  total  area  calculated  in  accordance 
with (a) above: 

the surfaces  of corridors, companionways  and other connecting  surfaces; 

surfaces  beneath  companionways; 

surfaces  permanently  occupied by gear or  furniture; 

surfaces  beneath  dinghies,  life-rafts  and  lifeboats,  even  where  these  are  placed 
high enough for passengers to get beneath them; 

small  surfaces,  including  those  between  seats  and  tables,  which  are  effectively 
unusable. 

(c) 

A load of 2.5  passengers  shall be considered  per m2 of free  deck  area  determined 
in  accordance  with  (a)  and  (b)  above; however,  this  load  shall  be  2.8  passengers 
in the case of vessels with a length LF of less than 25 m. 

2. 
The  authorised  maximum  number  of  passengers  shall  be  indicated  on  board  by 
means  of  easily  legible notices  affixed  in prominent  places.  In the  case of  cabin  vessels 
also  operated  for  day  excursions,  passenger  numbers  shall  be  calculated  as  for  a  day-
excursion vessel  and as for  a cabin vessel and entered on the  certificate. 

Articles  15.02  and  15.04  shall  be  complied  with  for  each  of  these  passenger 

numbers. 

In  the  case  of  vessels  used  exclusively  for  journeys 

involving  overnight 

accommodation,  the number of berths shall be  determinant. 

123 

Article  15.06 

Safety clearance, freeboard  and draught  marks 

The safety  clearance shall be at least equal to the sum  of: 

the  additional  lateral  draught,  measured  from  the  outside  plating,  resulting  from 
the authorised  angle of heel, and 

1. 

(a) 

(b) 

the residual safety  clearance prescribed  in Article  15.04, Sections 2 and 7. 

For vessels without  a bulkhead  deck, the safety  clearance shall be at least 0.50 m. 

2. 

(a) 

The freeboard  shall be at least equal to the sum  of: 

the  additional  lateral  draught,  measured  from  the  outside  plating,  resulting  from 
the angle of heel calculated  in accordance with Article  15.04, Section 2, and 

(b) 

the residual freeboard  prescribed  in Article  15.04, Sections 2 and 7. 

The freeboard  shall be at least 0.30 m. 

The plane  of  maximum  draught  shall  be  determined  in  such  a way  as to  comply 
3. 
with  the  safety  clearance  prescribed  in  Section  1, the  freeboard  prescribed  in  Section 2, 
and  Articles  15.02  to  15.04.  However,  for  safety  reasons  the  inspection  body  may  lay 
down a greater freeboard  or a greater safety  clearance. 

4. 
Draught  marks  shall  be  affixed  to  each  side  of  the  vessel  in  accordance  with 
Article 4.04.  Authorisation  will  be  given  for  additional  pairs  of  marks  or  a  continuous 
mark  to  be  affixed.  The  position  of  such  marks  shall  be  clearly  specified  in  the 
certificate. 

Article  15.07 

Passenger  installations 

Deck  areas  which  are  intended  for  passengers  and  are  not  enclosed  shall  be 
1. 
surrounded  by. a ship's  rail  or  guard  rail  at  least  1.00  m  high.  The  guard  rail  shall  be 
fitted  in such  a way that children  cannot fall  through  it.  Openings  and  installations  used 
to board  or leave the vessel  and openings used to load or unload  it shall be fitted  with  an 
appropriate safety  device. 

Gangways  shall be at least 0.60 m wide  and  shall be fitted  with  a railing  on  each 

side. 

(a) 

Connecting  corridors  and  companionways,  and  doors  and  exits  intended  for  use 
by  passengers,  shall  have  a clear width  of  at least  0.80 m.  This  may  be  reduced 
to 0.70 m for  doors to passenger cabins and other small rooms. 

Where a part of the vessel or a room  intended  for  passengers  is served by  a single 
connecting  corridor  or  companionway,  the  clear  width  thereof  shall  be  at  least 
one  metre.  On  vessels  whose  length  LF  is  less  than  25 m,  the  inspection  body 
may authorise a width of 0.80 m. 

In  the  case  of  rooms  or  groups  of  rooms  intended  for  more  than  80  passengers, 
the sum width of all the  exits provided  for  passengers  and which the  latter  would 
have to use in an emergency shall be at least 0.01 m per passenger. 

124 

(b) 

Rooms  or  groups  of  rooms  designed  or  arranged  for  30  or  more  passengers  or 
including  berths  for  12  or  more  passengers  shall  have  at  least  two  exits.  A 
watertight  bulkhead  door  complying  with  Article  15.03,  Sections 2,  4  or  5  and 
giving  access  to  an  adjacent  compartment  from  which  the  upper  deck  may  be 
reached shall be considered to be an exit. 

Such  exits shall be  appropriately  planned.  If the total width  of  the  exits  referred 
to  at  (a)  is determined  by  the number  of  passengers,  the width  of  each  exit  shall 
be  at  least  0.005 m  per  passenger.  Except  in  the  case  of  cabin  vessels,  one  of 
these two exits may be replaced by two emergency exits. 

Rooms  located  below  the main  deck  shall have  at least  one  direct  exit,  or  where 
appropriate one emergency  exit, giving onto the said  deck or to the outside.  This 
requirement does not apply to individual  cabins. 

Emergency  exits shall have a clear opening of at least 0.36 m2 and  a shortest  side 
not less than 0.50 m long. 

(c) 

Companionways  below the main  deck  shall be located within  two vertical  planes 
at  a  distance  of  at  least  1/5  BF  from  the  side  plating.  This  distance  is  not 
obligatory where there is at least one companionway  on each side of the vessel in 
the  same  room.  Companionways  shall  be  fitted  with  handrails  on  each  side;  a 
single handrail will be sufficient  for  companionways  less than 0.90 m wide. 

3. 
Doors  to  passenger  day-rooms,  except  those  opening  onto  corridors,  shall  be 
capable  of  opening  outwards  or  shall  be  constmcted  as  sliding  doors;  it  shall  not  be 
possible for non-authorised  persons to lock or bolt them  during sailing. 

Cabin  doors  shall  be  made  in  such  a  way  that  they  can  be  unlocked  from  the 

outside at any time. 

Evacuation  routes  and  emergency  exits  shall  be  clearly  signed;  these  signs  shall 

4. 
be lit by the emergency lighting syste2m. 

On board  vessels  authorised  to  carry  up  to  300  passengers  there  shall  be  at  least 
5. 
one  lavatory  per  150 passengers.  On  board  vessels  authorised  to  carry  more  than  300 
passengers  there  shall  be  separate  lavatories  for  each  sex,  at  the  rate  of  at  least  one  for 
every 200 passengers. 

6. 
The  entry  of  non-authorised  persons  into  those  parts  of  the vessel  which  are  not 
intended  for  passengers,  and  in  particular  access  to  the  wheelhouse  and  the  engine 
rooms, shall be forbidden.  In addition, the words "No  entry" or a corresponding  symbol 
shall appear in a prominent place at the access points to such parts of the vessel. 

7. 
in fire protection may be used for glazing located  in the area accessible to passengers. 

Only  toughened  glass,  laminated  glass  or  a synthetic  material  authorised  for  use 

125 

Article  15.08 

Special requirements for  survival equipment 

1. 
table: 

Passenger  vessels  shall  carry  the  number  of  lifebuoys  indicated  in  the  following 

LF in m 

Authorised maximum number 
of passengers 

Number of lifebuoys 

up to 25 
more than 25 to 35 
more than 35 to 50 
more than 50 

- 

I 

up to 200 
201 to 300 
301 to 600 
601 to 900 
901 to 1200 
over 1200 

| 

3 
4 
.  6 
8 
10 
12 

The  number  of  lifebuoys,  shall  be  determined  by  reference  to  the  larger  of  the 

values resulting from  the first  and second columns. 

Half  the  prescribed  lifebuoys  shall  be  fitted  with  a  buoyant  line  at  least  30 m 

long. 

2. 
Vessels  with  a  length  LF  of  less  than  25 m  shall,  in  addition  to  the  lifebuoys 
required  under  Section  1, carry  individual  or  collective  survival  equipment  both  for  the 
entire  maximum  number  of  passengers  authorised  for  the  vessel's  operating  mode  and 
for  the vessel's  service crew.  Where buoyancy  in the  event of  a leak has  been  checked, 
the requirements referred  to in Section 3 shall be applied. 

3. 
can be easily and safely reached.  Concealed  storage places shall be clearly  signed. 

Survival  equipment shall be stored  on board  in such  a way that  in case of need  it 

4. 
Individual  survival  equipment  is  the  lifebuoys  and  life-jackets  referred  to  in 
Article  10.05  and  buoyancy  aids  and  appropriate  equipment  capable  of  supporting  a 
person in the water. 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

The buoyancy  aids and appropriate equipment shall: 

provide a buoyancy of at least  100 N in fresh  water; 

be  made  of  a  suitable  material  and  be  resistant  to  oil  and  oil-derived  products, 
and to temperatures of up to 50°C; 

be fitted with appropriate devices enabling them to be grabbed;  , 

have  a fluorescent  orange  colour  or  have permanently  fixed  fluorescent  surfaces 
measuring at least  100 cm2. 

Inflatable  individual  survival  equipment  shall be  checked  in  accordance with  the 

manufacturer's  instmctions. 

Collective  survival  equipment  is  dinghies,  life-rafts  and  appropriate  equipment 

5. 
capable of supporting several persons in the water.  These shall: 

(a) 

bear  an  inscription  indicating  how  they  are  to  be  used  and  the  number  of 
passengers for which they  are approved; 

(b) 

provide a buoyancy of at least  100 N in fresh  water; 

126 

(c) 

(d) 

(e) 

(f) 

6. 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

assume  and maintain  a stable trim  and,  in this respect,  be fitted  with' appropriate 
devices enabling them to be grabbed by the indicated number of persons; 

be  made  of  a  suitable  material  and  be  resistant  to  oil  and  oil-derived  products, 
and to temperatures of up to 50°C; 

have  a fluorescent  orange  colour  or have  permanently  fixed  fluorescent  surfaces 
measuring at least  100 cm2; 

from  their place of storage be rapidly and safely  launchable by a single person. 

Inflatable  survival  equipment shall in addition: 

comprise at least two separate air compartments; 

inflate  automatically or by manual command when  launched; 

assume and maintain  a stable trim whatever  load  it is supporting,  even when only 
half the air compartments are  inflated; 

(d) 

be checked in accordance with the manufacturer's  instmctions. 

Article  15.09 

Fire protection  and fire-fighting in passenger  spaces 

1. 
Decks separating passenger  areas from  one another or from  the engine rooms  and 
wheelhouse,  and  bulkheads  and  walls  between  passenger  areas  and  engine  rooms  and 
between passenger areas and galleys shall be  fire-retardant. 

Partition  walls  and doors  separating  corridors  from  cabins  and  cabins  from  other 

cabins shall be  fire-retardant. 

Partition  walls  between  corridors  and  cabins  shall  extend  from  deck  to  deck  or 

shall extend up to a fire-resistant  ceiling. 

Where  appropriate  sprinkler  systems  have  been  fitted  the  prescriptions  of  the 

second  and third paragraphs of this Section shall not be  compulsory. 

Free spaces above ceilings, under floors  and behind  facings  shall be subdivided  at 

no more than  10 m intervals by fire-resistant  structural parts. 

Companionways,  exits  and emergency  exits shall be so disposed  that  in the  event 

2. 
of a fire in any area, the other areas may be evacuated  safely. 

Companionways.  including  their  steps,  shall  include  a frame  made  of  steel  or  an 

equivalent non-flammable  material.  The steps shall be  fire-resistant. 

On cabin vessels  they  shall  be located  within  a stairwell  fitted  with  fire-retardant 

walls and with automatically  closing fire-retardant  doors. 

A  companionw ay  which  links  only  two  decks  need  not  be  surrounded  by  a 
stairwell  where  one  of  these  decks  is  surrounded  by  fire-retardant  bulkheads  with 
automatically  closing  fire-retardant  doors  or  where  appropriate  sprinkler  devices  have 
been  installed. 

Stairwells shall link directly to the corridors and external decks. 

Account  shall  be  taken  of  the  increased  fire  risk in  galleys,  hairdressing  salons 

3. 
and perfume  shops in accordance with the prescriptions of the competent  authorities. 

127 

4. 
Paint,  varnish  and  other  surface  treatment  products  used  indoors,  as  well  as 
materials used to face and insulate, shall be of a fire-resistant  type.  In the event of  fire 
they shall not give off dangerous amounts of smoke or toxic gas; 

Door-opening mechanisms shall function  normally for  a sufficiently  long period 

in the event of fire. 

5. 
Corridors  which  are more than 40 m  long  shall  be  subdivided  by  fire-retardant 
partition walls fitted with automatically closing doors at intervals of no more than 40 m. 

Automatically  closing  fire-retardant  doors  which  are  left  open  during  normal 
6. 
service  shall  be  closable  from  a place  which  is  permanently  occupied  by  the  vessel's 
crew and shall be closable on the spot. 

7. 
fire through such installations.  It shall be possible to close the air inlet and outlet vents. 

Ventilation  installations  shall be built  in such a way  as to prevent the spread of 

Continuous  ducts shall be subdivided  at intervals of no more than 40 m by  fire 

valves. 

Ventilation  ducts  which  pass  through  stairwell  partition  walls  or  engine  room 

bulkheads shall be fitted with fire valves where they pass through such walls. 

It shall be possible to  switch  off  built-in ventilators  from  a central unit  located 

outside the engine room. 

On cabin vessels  all cabins and day-rooms for  passengers  and crew members as 
8. 
well as the galleys and engine rooms shall be linked to an appropriate fire alarm system. 
The presence of a fire and its location shall be signalled automatically to a place which is 
permanently occupied by the vessel's crew. 

9. 

(a) 
(b) 
(c) 

Passenger vessels shall be fitted with a fire-fighting  system comprising: 

a fixed, powered fire pump; 
piping with a sufficient  number of hydrants; 
a sufficient  number of fire hoses. 

Fire-fighting  installations  shall be so  arranged  and of  such dimensions  that any 
point on the vessel may be reached from  at least two different  hydrants, in each case by 
using a single fire hose no more than 20 m long.  Water pressure at the hydrant shall be 
at least 3 bar.  On the highest deck it shall be possible to achieve a jet length of at least 
6 m. 

Fire pumps shall  not be installed  forward  of the collision bulkhead.  Where the 
fire  pump  is  installed  in  the  main  engine  room,  a second  powered  fire  pump  shall  be 
installed  outside  that  room  such  as  may  be  used  independently  of  the  engine  room 
installations.  This pump may be portable. 

Normal service and deck wash pumps and deck wash pipes may be encompassed 

within the fire-fighting  installation where appropriate. 

On cabin  vessels with  a length  LF less than  25 m and  on  day-excursion  vessels 

with a length LF less than 40 m the following derogations are allowed: 

(a) 
(b) 

the fire pump need not be a fixed  installation; 
where the fire  pump is installed  in the main  engine room  a second  pump  is not 
required; 

128 

(c) 

it  is  sufficient  that  every  point  on  the  vessel  may  be  reached  from  one  hydrant 
using a single fire hose no more than 20 m long. 

10. 
following  extinguishers  at least shall be carried on board: 

In  addition  to  the  extinguishers  prescribed  in  Article  10.03,  Section  1,  the 

(a) 

one  extinguisher  for  every  120 m2  of  gross  floor  area,  rounded  up  to  the  next 
120 m2, in day-rooms, dining rooms and similar areas; 

(b) 

one extinguisher for  every group of  10 cabins, rounded upwards. 

These  additional  extinguishers  shall  be  located  around  the vessel  in  such  a  way 

that one of them  is to hand at all times no matter where a fire breaks out. 

Article  15.10 

Supplementary  requirements 

1. 

Lighting shall be provided  solely by electric lighting systems. 

2. 
Article 9.18,  Section 2. 

There  shall  be  an  emergency  electric  lighting  system  within  the  meaning  of 

3. 
Where  direct  communication  is  not  possible  between  the  wheelhouse  and  the 
crew's  living  quarters, the operating  areas, the fore  and  aft  sections  of the vessel  and  the 
passenger  access points,  a communication  system providing  a sure  and  reliable  two-way 
link shall be provided. 

4. 
passengers shall be equipped with loudspeakers  capable of reaching  all passengers. 

Vessels  with  a  length  LF of  40 m  or  more  or  authorised  to  carry  more  than  75 

5. 

Cabin vessels shall have an alarm system.  This shall comprise: 

(a) 

an alarm  system to warn the vessel command  and the crew: 

This alarm shall be given only in areas assigned  to vessel  command  and the  crew; 
it shall be possible for  the vessel  command to stop the  alarm.  It shall  be  possible 
to trigger the alarm from  at least the following  places: 

in each cabin; 

in  the  corridors,  lifts  and  stairwells,  with  the  distance  to  the  nearest  trigger  not 
exceeding  10 m and with at least one trigger per watertight  compartment; 

in the lounges, dining rooms and similar areas; 

in the engine rooms, galleys and similar  areas exposed to fire  risk. 

(b) 

an alarm  system to warn passengers: 

This  alarm  shall  sound  clearly  and  unmistakably  in  all  areas  accessible  to 
passengers.  It  shall  be  possible  to  trigger  it  from  the  wheelhouse  and  from  a 
location  permanently  occupied  by the crew. 

Alarm triggers shall be protected  against unintentional use. 

Cabin  vessels  shall  be  equipped  with  a  radio-telephone  system  allowing 

6. 
communication  with the public telephone  network. 

129 

7. 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

(e) 

(f) 

(g) 

(h) 

8. 

(a) 
(b) 
(c) 
(d) 

(a) 
(b) 

(c) 
(d) 
(e) 
(f) 
(g) 
(h) 
(i) 
(j) 
(k) 
(1) 
(m) 
(n) 
(o) 

The following  points and areas at least shall be adequately  lit: 

the  points  where  collective  survival  equipment  is  stored  and  those  where  it  is 
normally prepared for use; 

evacuation  routes, passenger  access points, corridors, lifts  and  companionways  in 
the accommodation  and the cabin and accommodation  areas; 

signs indicating evacuation routes and exits; 

engine rooms and their exits; 

the wheelhouse; 

the room housing the emergency power source; 

the points where extinguishers  and fire pumps are located; 

the areas in which passengers  and crew muster in the event of danger. 

On  cabin vessels,  a safety  plan  shall  be kept  on  board  indicating  the  tasks  to  be 
performed  by the crew and staff  in the event of an emergency  in accordance with 
the police requirements  in force.  Tasks shall be indicated for the following  cases: 

a leak; 
a fire on board; 
evacuation of passengers; 
a man  overboard. 

The safety  plan shall include a plan of the vessel indicating clearly  and precisely: 

the survival and safety  equipment; 
the watertight  doors located below  deck and the position of their  controls,  as well 
as other openings such as those referred  to in Article  15.03,  Sections 2 and 6; 
fire-retardant  doors; 
fire-dampers; 
alarm installations; 
fire alarm  system; 
fire-fighting  installations  and  extinguishers; 
evacuation routes and emergency exits; 
the emergency power source; 
the ventilation  system  controls; 
connection to the earthing network; 
closing controls for fuel  supply pipes; 
liquefied  gas plant; 
loudspeaker systems; 
radio-telephone  installations. 

The  safety  plan  and the  plan  of  the vessel  shall  bear  the  stamp  of  the  inspection 

body and be displayed  prominently  at appropriate locations. 

On  cabin  vessels  a general  evacuation  plan  shall  be  displayed  for  passengers  at 
9. 
appropriate  locations.  The  plan  may  be  combined  with  the  safety  plan  required  under 
Section 8. 

The requisite  instmctions  to  passengers  on  what  to  do  in  the  event  of  an  alarm, 
fire,  damage  to  the  vessel  and  evacuation  and  indicating  the  location  of  the  survival 
equipment shall be provided  in each cabin. 

These instmctions shall be written in Dutch, English, French  and  German. 

130 

10. 
In  the  case  of  vessels  with  a  wooden,  aluminium  or  synthetic  hull,  the  engine 
rooms  shall  be  constmcted  of  materials  referred  to  in  Article 3.04,  Sections  3  and  5,  or 
be  equipped  with  a  permanently  installed  extinguishing  system  within  the  meaning  of 
Article  10.03,  Section 5. 

Article  15.11 

Waste collection and disposal  facilities 

1. 
with waste water collection tanks or with on-board treatment plant. 

Passenger  vessels" with  more  than  50  passenger  berths  shall  be  equipped  either 

Waste  water  collection  tanks  shall  have  sufficient  volume.  They  shall  be  fitted 
2. 
with a device to indicate their content level.  To empty the tanks, the vessel  shall have its 
own pumps  and pipes with which  to  evacuate the waste water to berths  situated  to  either 
side  of  the  vessel.  The  pipes  shall  be  fitted  with  waste  water  evacuation  joints  in 
accordance with European standard EN  1306. 

3. 
On-board  treatment  plant  shall  at all times  and without  dilution  be  able to  ensure 
the  exit limit value required  by  the  police  provisions  in  force.  A  sampling  device  shall 
be fitted  immediately before the outlet. 

131 

Chapter  16 

SPECIFIC PROVISIONS  CONCERNING 
CRAFT INTENDED TO FORM PART OF A PUSHED  OR 
TOWED TRAIN OR OF A BREASTED-UP  FORMATION 

Article  16.01 

Pusher  craft 

1. 
pushing device.  They shall be designed  and equipped  in such a way as to: 

Craft  which  are  to  be  used  for  pushing  purposes  shall  incorporate  a  suitable 

a)  enable  crews  easily  and  safely  to  cross  over  to  the  pushed  craft  by  means  of  the 

coupling device; 

b)  enable  them  to  occupy  a fixed  position  in  relation  to  the  coupled  craft  following  the 

coupling  operation 

c)  prevent transverse movement between the vessels themselves. 

2. 
at least two special winches or equivalent coupling devices. 

If the craft  are joined  together with  cables the pusher  craft  shall be  equipped  with 

The  coupling  devices  shall  enable  a rigid  assembly  to be formed  with the pushed 

3. 
craft. 

Where  vessel  cranes  consist  of  a  pusher  craft  and  a  single  pushed  craft  the  coupling 
devices  may  permit  controlled  articulation.  The  necessary  controls  shall  easily  absorb 
the  forces  to  be  transmitted  and  shall  be  capable  of  being  controlled  easily  and  safely. 
Articles 6.02 to 6.04 shall apply by analogy to such installations. 

The collision  bulkhead  referred  to  in Article 3.03(l)(a)  is not required  for  pusher 

4. 
craft. 

Article  16.02 

Pushed  craft 

1. 
accommodation,  engine room or boilers: 

shall  not  apply 

following 

The 

to 

lighters  with  no  steering 

system, 

a)  Chapters  5-7, and  12; 

b)  Articles  8.06(2-8),  10.02 and  10.05(1). 

c)  If  steering  system,  accommodation,  engine  rooms  or  boilers  are  present  the  relevant 

requirements  of this Regulation  shall apply to them. 

In  addition  ship  lighters  whose  length  L  does  not  exceed  40 m  shall  meet  the 

2. 
following  design requirements: 

132 

a)  The  watertight  transverse  bulkheads  referred  to  in Article  3.03(1)  are  not  required  if 
their  front  faces  are  able  to  bear  a  load  at  least  2.5 times  that  set  for  the  collision 
bulkheads  on inland waterway vessels having the same draught  and having being built 
in accordance with the requirements of an approved  classification  society. 

b) By  way  of  exemption  from  Article 8.06(1)  double-bottomed  compartments  to  which 
access is difficult  do not have to be drainable if their volume  exceeds  5% of the water 
displacement of the ship lighter at the maximum  authorised  loaded  draught. 

3. 

Other  craft  which  have  to  be  pushed  shall  be  fitted  with  coupling  devices 

enabling a safe  connection to be made with other  craft. 

Article  16.03 

Craft designed to propel  breasted-up  formations 
Craft  intended  to  propel  breasted-up  formations  shall  be  equipped  with  bollards  or 
equivalent  devices  which,  as  a  result  of  their  number  and  arrangement,  enable  the 
formation  to be linked together  in a safe  manner. 

Article  16.04 

Craft designed for  use in trains 

Craft  intended  for  use  in  trains  shall  be  equipped  with  coupling  devices,  bollards  or 
equivalent  devices which,  as a result of their number  and  arrangement,  closely  link  these 
with the other craft  in the train. 

Article  16.05 

Craft which may be used for  towing purposes 

Craft  which  are  to  be  used  for  towing  operations  shall  meet  the  following 

1. 
conditions: 

a)  The  towing  equipment  shall  be  arranged  in  such  a  way  that  their  use  does  not 

compromise the safety  of the craft,  crew or cargo. 

b)  Craft  intended  for  tugging  and  towing  shall  be  fitted  with  a tow hook  which  shall  be 

capable of safe release from  the steering position. 

c)  Winches  or  a  tow  hook  which  can  be  released  from  the  steering  position  shall 
constitute  towing  devices.  It  shall  be possible  to  arrange those towing  devices  ahead 
of  the propeller  plane.  That  requirement  shall  not  apply  to  craft  that  are  steering  by 
their drive units such as cycloidal propulsion units or swivelling propellers. 

d) By  way  of  an exemption  from  the requirements  of  (c)  for  craft  which  are  to  be  used 
solely  for  back-up  towing,  a towing  device  such  as  a bollard  which  is  to  be  located 
ahead of the propeller plane may be used. 

133 

e)  Where the towing  cables, could  snag on the stem  of the vessel there must he  deflector 

hoops. 

2. 

Craft whose length L exceeds 86 m may not be used for towing  downstream. 

Article  16.06 

Tests on trains of vessels 

1. 
In order to issue the certificate  of fitness  for  a pusher craft  or self-propelled  barge 
that is to propel  a rigid  train,  and to  enter this in the certificate,  the inspection  body  shall 
decide  which  trains  are  to  be  submitted  to  it  and  will  conduct  the  navigation  tests 
referred  to in Article 5.02 with the train in those formation(s)  requested, which  seem to it 
to  be  the  least  suitable.  The  requirements  set  out  in Articles  5.02-5.10  shall  be  met  by 
this train. 

The inspection body shall check that the rigid  formation  comprising all of the craft  in the 
train is maintained  during the manoeuvres required by Chapter 5. 

2. 
If during the tests referred  to in  Section  1  there are specific  installations  on board 
the  craft  that  are being  either  pushed  or breasted-up,  such  as the  steering  system,  power 
plant  or  manoeuvring  equipment,  or  articulated  couplings  in  order  to  meet  the 
requirements  set  out  in  Articles 5.02-5.10,  the  following  shall  be  mentioned  in  the 
certificate  for  the  craft  propelling  the  crane:  formation,  position,  name  and  official 
number of those craft  accepted  and fitted  with the specific  installations used. 

Article  16.07 

Entries  on the certificate 

1. 
mention its compliance with the relevant requirements  as set out in Article  16.01-16.06. 

If  a craft  is  intended  to  push  a train,  or  be  pushed  in  a train,  the  certificate  shall 

The  following  information  shall  be  entered  in the  certificate  for  the  craft  that  is 

2. 
intended to provide the motive power: 

a)  the trains and formations  that have been  accepted; 
b) the types of  coupling; 
c)  the maximum  coupling forces  transmitted  and, 
d) here  appropriate,  the  minimum  tensile  strength  of  the  coupling  cables  for  the 

longitudinal link and  the number of cable windings. 

134 

Chapter 17 

SPECIFIC PROVISIONS  GOVERNING FLOATING  EQUIPMENT 

Article  17.01 

General 

Chapter 3,  7-14,  and  16 apply  to  the  stmcture  and  working  gear  of  floating  equipment. 
Floating  equipment  with  a  mechanical  means  of  motive  power  shall  also  meet  the 
requirements  of  Chapters 5  and  6.  Motive  power  only  permitting  short-haul  operation 
shall not constitute mechanical means of motive power. 

Article  17.02 

Exemptions 

1. 

The inspection body may grant exemptions to the following  provisions: 

(a)  Article 3.03, sections  1 and 2, shall apply by  analogy; 

(b)  Article 7.03  shall apply by analogy; 

(c) 

the maximum  sound  pressure  levels prescribed  by Article  12.02,  section  5,  second 
sentence,  may  be  exceeded  while  the  floating  equipment's  working  gear  is 
operating, provided that, during service, nobody  sleeps on board  at night. 

(d) 

exemptions  may  be  granted  from  other  provisions  concerning  structure,  working 
gear or rigging provided  that equal safety  is ensured  in each case. 

2. 

The inspection body may choose not to implement the following  provisions: 

(a)  Article  10.01:  Section  1 shall  not  apply  if  during  operation  of  floating  equipment 
that  equipment  may  be  securely  anchored  by  means  of  a working  anchor  or  piles. 
However,  floating  equipment  with  its  own  motive  power  shall  at  least  have  an 
anchor  as  defined  in  Article  10.01,  section  1, where  an  empirical  coefficient  k  is 
taken to be equal to 45, and the smallest lateral height is taken for  T. 

(b)  Article  12.02, section  1, second phrase: if the accommodation  can be adequately  lit 

by means of  electricity. 

3. 

The following  also apply: 

(a) 

(b) 

as  a  departure  from  Article 8.06,  section 2,  second  sentence,  there  shall  be  a 
power-driven pump instead of a hand-operated pump; 

as  a  departure  from  Article 8.08," section 3,  the  noise  shall  not  exceed  65  dB(A) 
within  a  footprint  extending  25 m  from  the  sidewalls  of  any  floating  equipment 
while its working gear is operating; 

(c) 

by  way  of  a  departure  from  Article  10.03,  section  1,  at  least  one  further  manual 
extinguisher  is required  if the working equipment is on the deck. 

(d)  by way  of  a departure  from  Chapter  14, in  addition  to the  liquefied-gas  equipment 
for  domestic  use,  there  may  also  be  other  liquefied-gas  facilities.  Those  facilities 
and their accessories  shall meet the requirements of one of the Member  States. 

135 

Article  17.03 

Additional  requirements 

1. 
Floating  equipment  on  which  persons  are  present  during  their  operation  shall  be 
fitted  with  a  general  alarm.  The  alarm  signal  shall  be  clearly  different  from  the  other 
signals  and,  within  accommodation  and  at  all  work  stations,  shall  produce  a  sound 
pressure  level  that  is  at  least  5 dB(A)  higher  than  the  maximum  local  sound  pressure 
level.  It  shall  be possible to  actuate  the  alarm  from  the wheelhouse  and  the main  work 
stations. 

Items  of  floating  equipment  shall  be  fully  able  to  withstand  their  loads  and  meet 

2. 
the national requirements of one of the Member  States of the Community. 

3. 
The  stability  and  strength  of  floating  equipment,  and  where  appropriate  of  their 
tethering,  shall  be  such  that  they  may  withstand  the stresses resulting  from  the  list,  trim 
and movements of that equipment which may  occur. 

4. 
If  loads  are lifted  by means  of hoists  the  maximum  authorised  load  deriving  from 
stability  and  strength  shall  be  clearly  stated  on  a  panel  on  the  deck  and  at  the  control 
station. 
If  the  lifting  capacity  can  be  increased  by  linkage  with  further  floating 
equipment the values  authorised  both  with  and  without  that floating  equipment  shall  be 
clearly stated. 

The certificate  referred  to in Annex III or IV shall be issued for floating  equipment 

5. 
that has been accepted for operation in coastal regions or at sea. 

Article  17.04 

Residual safety clearance 

1. 
The  residual  safety  clearance  is  the  shortest  vertical  distance  between  water  level 
and the lowest part  of the floating  equipment below which this  is no longer leakproof  as 
a  result  of  the  trim  and  list  resulting  from  the  moments  referred  to  in  Article  17.07, 
section 4. 

2.  Within  the  meaning  of  Article  17.07,  section  1,  a  residual  safety  clearance  of 
300 mm is sufficient  for  any aperture that is proof against spray  and bad weather; 

If  the  aperture  is  not  proof  against  spray  and  bad  weather  the  residual  safety 

3. 
clearance shall be at least 400 mm. 

Article  17.05 

Residual  freeboard 

The residual  freeboard  is the  smallest  vertical  distance  between  the  surface  of  the 
1. 
water  and  the top  of  the  deck  arising  from  the trim  and  list  resulting  from  the  moments 
referred  to in Article  17.07, section 4. 

The residual  freeboard  meets the requirements  of Article  17.07, section  1, if  it is at 

2. 
least 300 mm. 

The  residual  freeboard  may  be  reduced  if  it  is  proven  that  the  requirements  of 

3. 
Article  17.08 have been met. 

13b 

4.  Where the shape of an item of floating equipment differs  perceptibly  from  that of a 
pontoon,  as  in the  case  of  cylindrical  floating  equipment,  or where  the  cross-section  of 
floating  equipment  has  more  than  four  sides,  the  inspection  body  may  require  and 
authorise  residual  freeboards  that  differ  from  those  referred  to  in  section 2.  This  also 
applies to an item of floating  equipment consisting of several floating  installations. 

Article  17.06 

Lateral stability  tests 

The stability  test referred  to in Articles  17.07 and  17.08 shall be based  on  a  lateral 

1. 
stability test that has been carried out in a proper manner. 

2. 
If  during  a  lateral  stability  test  it  is  not  possible  to  achieve  adequate  list,  or  if  the 
lateral  stability  test  causes unreasonable  technical  difficulties,  this  may  be replaced  by  a 
calculation  of  the  craft's  centre  of  gravity  and  weight.  The  result  of  the  weight 
calculation  shall  be  checked  by  measuring  the  draught,  and  the  difference  shall  not 
exceed + 5%. 

Article  17.07 

Confirmation of stability 

1. 
It shall be confirmed  that, when  account has been taken of the loads applied  during 
the use  and  operation  of the working gear,  the residual  freeboard  and  the residual  safety 
clearance  are  adequate.  For  that  purpose  the  sum  of  the  list  and  trim  angles  shall  not 
exceed  10° and the base of the hull shall not emerge. 

2. 

Stability  confirmation  shall include the following  data and documents: 

(a) 

scale  drawings  of  the  floating  equipment  and  working  gear  and  the  detailed  data 
relating to  these that  are  needed  to  confirm  stability,  such  as  content  of  the tanks, 
opening providing access to the inside of the vessel; 

(b)  hydrostatic data or curves; 

(c) 

curves for  the static-stability  lever-arm  effects  to the extent required  in  accordance 
with section  5 below or Article  17.08; 

(d)  description of the situations of use together with the corresponding  data  concerning 
weight  and  centre  of  gravity,  including  its  unladen  state  and  the  equipment 
situation  as regards  transport; 

(e) 

calculation  of  the  list,  trim  and  righting  moments,  with  statement  of  the  list  and 
trim  angles and the corresponding residual free board safety  clearances; 

(f) 

all of the results of the calculation with a statement of the use and load limits. 

3. 

Stability  checking shall be based on the following  load conditions: 

(a) 

specific  mass of the dredging products for  dredgers 
sands and gravels:  1.5  t/m3 
very wet sands: 2.0 t/m3 

137 

earth, on average:  1.8 t/m3 
mixture of sand and water in the ducts:  1.3  t/m3; 
for  clamshell  dredgers,  the  values  given  under  letter  (a)  are  to  be  increased  by 
15%; 
for hydraulic dredgers the maximum  lifting  power must be considered. 

(b) 

(c) 

4.1  Stability  checking shall take account of the moments resulting  from: 
(a) 
(b) 
(c) 
(d) 
(e) 
(f) 
(g) 
(h) 
(i) 
(j) 
The moments which may act simultaneously  shall be added up. 

the load; 
the asymmetric stmcture; 
the wind pressure; 
the turning, under way, of self-propelled  equipment; 
the cross current,  if necessary; 
the ballast  and provisions; 
the deck cargoes and, where appropriate, the  freight; 
the clear surfaces  occupied by liquids; 
the inertia  forces 
other mechanical  equipment. 

The  moment  caused  by  the wind  pressure  shall  be  calculated  in  accordance  with 

4.2 
the following  formula: 
Lo 

Mv  = c • pv  • S  (lv  +  _ ! _) 

[kNm] 

where: 

c  = 

shape-dependent  coefficient  of resistance 

For  frameworks  one  must take  c =  1.2  and  for  solid-section  beams  c =  1.6.  The 
two values take account of gusts. 

All of the surfaces  included  in the frame  envelope must be taken to be the  surface 
area exposed to the wind. 

pv = 

specific wind pressure; this must consistently be taken to be 0.25  kN/m2; 

S  = 

side surface  area of the floating  installation  in m2; 

lv  = 

distance  from  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  side  surface  S of  the  installation  from 
the plane of maximum  draught,  in m; 

In  order  to  determine  the  moments  due  to  turning  while  under  way  referred  to  in 
installations  sail  freely,  the  formula  set  out  in 

4.3 
item 4.1,  (d)  where  self-propelled 
Article  15.04, section 6, must be used. 

4.4  The  moment  resulting  from  the  cross  current  referred  to  in  item 4.1  (e)  must  only 
be  taken  into  account  for  floating  equipment  which  is  anchored  or  moored  across  the 
current while operating. 

4.5  The  least  favourable  extent  of tank  filling  on  stability  shall  be  determined  and  the 
corresponding  moment  introduced  into  the  calculation  when  calculating  the  moments 
resulting from  the liquid ballast and the liquid  provisions referred  to in item 4.1  (f). 

4.6  The moment  resulting  from  the forces  of  inertia  referred  to  in  item 4.1  (i) must  be 
given  due consideration  if the  movements  of  the  load  and  the  installations  working  gear 
are likely  to affect  its stability. 

138 

5.  - •  The  righting  moments  for  floating  installations  with  vertical  side  walls  may  be 
calculated via the  formula 

MR  =10-D-  MG-siny  [kNm] 

where: 

MG  = metacentric height, in m; 

cp = list angle in degrees. 

That  formula  now  applies up  to  list  angles  of  10° or  up  to  a list  angle  corresponding  to 
immersion  of  the  edge  of  the  deck  or  emergence  of  the  edge  of  the  bottom. 
In  this 
instance the smallest angle is decisive.  The formula  may be applied to oblique side walls 
up to list angles of 5°; incidentally the limit conditions set out in Sections 3 and 4 apply. 

If  the  particular  shape  of  the  floating  installation(s)  does  not  permit  that  simplification 
the lever-effect  curves referred  to in Section 2(c) are required 

Article  17.08 

Confirmation  of stability  in the case of reduced residual freeboard 

If  a  reduced  residual  freeboard  is  taken  into  account  in  pursuance  of  Article  17.05 
Section 3, it must be checked  for  all operating  conditions: 

a)  that,  after  correction  for  the free  surfaces  of  liquids, the metacentric  height  is not  less 

than  15 cm; 

b)  that, for  list angles of between  0 and 30°, there is a righting lever effect  of at least 

0.30-0.28  -cpjm] 

(p„  being  the  list  angle  from  which  the  lever-arm  curve  displays  negative  values 
(stability  limit);  it  may  not  be  the  less than  20°  or  0.35 rad  and  shall  not  be  introduced 
into the formula  for more than 30° or 0.52 rad, taking the radian  (rad)  (1° = 0.01745  rad) 
for the unit of  cp n. 

c)  that the sum of the list and trim  angles does not exceed  10°; 

d) that a residual safety  clearance within the meaning of Article  17.06 remains; 

e)  that a residual freeboard  of at least 0.05 m remains; 

f)  that, for  list angles of between  0 and 30°, a residual  lever effect  of at least 

0.20 - 0.23  • cp  [m] 

where  cp n is the list  angle  from  which  the lever-arm  curve displayed  negative values; 
this should not be introduced  into the formula  for more than 30° or 0.52  rad. 

139 

Residual  lever  effect  should  be  taken  to  mean  the  maximum  difference  existing 
between  0°  and  30°  of  lifts  between  the  curve  for  the  righting  lever  effects  and  the 
curve  for  the  tilt  lever  effects. 
If  an  opening  towards  the  inside  of  the  vessel  is 
reached  by  the  water  at  a  list  angle  less  than  that  corresponding  to  the  maximum 
difference  between  the  lever-effect  curves,  the  lever  effect  corresponding  to  that  list 
angle shall be taken into  account. 

Article  17.09 

Draught marks and draught  scales 

Draught  marks  and  draught  scales  shall  be  affixed  in  accordance with  Articles  4.04  and 
4.06. 

Article  17.10 

Floating  installations  without confirmation of stability 

1. 

The following  floating  installations may be exempted from  Articles  17.04-17.08: 

a)  those whose working gear may in no way alter their list or trim and 

b)  those where there can in no way be any displacement of the centre of gravity. 

2. 

However, 

a)  at maximum  load  the  safety  clearance  shall  be  at  least  300 mm  and  the  freeboard  at 

least  150 mm; 

b)  for  apertures  which  cannot  be  closed  in  such  a  way  as  to  exclude  spray  and  bad 

weather the safety  clearance shall be at least 500 mm. 

140 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING WORKSITE  CRAFT 

Chapter 18 

Articlel8.01 

Operating conditions 

Worksite  craft  designated  as  such  in  the  certificate  referred  to  in  Annex II  or  IV  may 
only  move  outside  worksites  when  unladen.  That restriction  shall  be mentioned  on  the 
certificate: 

For  this  purpose  worksite  craft  shall  bear  a  certificate  from  the  competent  authority 
concerning  the  duration  and  geographical  confmes  of  the  worksite  on  which  the  craft 
may be operated. 

Article  18.02 

Implementation  of Part II 

Unless  otherwise  specified  by this  chapter  the  stmcture  and  equipment  of worksite  craft 
shall be in line with Chapters 3-14 of Part II. 

Article  18.03 

Exemptions 

1. 

a) 

Article 3.03, Section  1, shall apply by analogy; 

b)  Chapters  5 and 6 shall apply by analogy where the craft  is self propelled; 

c)  Article  10.02,  Section 2, (a) and (b) shall apply by analogy; 

d) 

the  inspection  body  may  grant  exemptions  to  the  other  requirements  concerning 
stmcture,  equipment  and  rigging  provided  that  equivalent  safety  is  proven  in  every 
case. 

2.  The inspection  body may choose not to implement the following  provisions: 

a)  Article  8.06,  Section  2-8, if no crew is required; 

b)  Article  10.01,  Sections  1 and  3,  if  the  worksite  craft  may  safely  be  anchored  by 
working  anchors  or  piles.  However,  self-propelled  worksite  craft  are to be  equipped 
with  an  anchor  in  accordance  with  Article  10.01,  Section  1, where  coefficient  k  is 
equal to 45 and T is taken  to be the lowest lateral height. 

c)  Article  10.02,  Section  1. (c), if the worksite craft  is not self  propelled. 

141 

Article  18.04 

Safety clearance and freeboard 

1. 
If  a worksite  craft  is  used  as  a  barrier  barge  or  ram  vessel  the  safety  clearance 
outside the hold area shall be 300 mm and the freeboard  at least  150 mm.  The  inspection 
body may  permit  a smaller  freeboard  if proof via  calculation  is provided  that  stability  is 
adequate for  a cargo having  a density of  1.5 t/m  and that no side of the deck reaches the 
water.  The effect  of the liquid  cargo shall be taken into account. 

The provisions  of Articles 4.01  and 4.02  shall  apply by  analogy  to worksite  craft 
2. 
not  covered  by  Section  1.  The  inspection  body  may  accept  values  departing  from  the 
above for the safety  clearance and the  freeboard. 

Article  18.05 

Dinghies 

Worksite craft  are not required to have a dinghy where: 

a)  they are not self propelled  or 

b)  another dinghy is available on the worksite. 

That exemption shall be mentioned  in the  certificate. 

142 

Chapter 19 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING CANAL BARGES 

(left void) 

143 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING SEA GOING VESSELS 

Chapter 20 

(left void) 

144 

Chapter 21 

SPECIFIC REQURBEMENTS CONCERNING  SPORTS  CRAFT 

Article 21.01 

General 

Only Articles 21.02 and 21.03 shall apply to the stmcture and equipment of sports  craft. 

Article 21.02 

Implementation  of Part II 

Sports craft  shall meet the following  requirements. 

1.  Articles  3.01, 3.02,  Section  1(a) and  Section  2,  3.03,  Section  1(a) and  Sections  6 and 

3.04,  Section  1; 

2.  Chapter 5; 

3.  Articles  6.01, Section  1, and 6.08; 
4.  Articles  7.01,  Sections  1 and  2,  7.02,  7.03,  Sections  1 and  2,  7.04,  Section  1,  7.05, 

Section 2, 7.13  for  sports craft  approved for radar navigation by one person; 

5.  Articles  8.01,  Sections  1 and  2,  8.02,  Sections  1 and  2,  8.03,  Sections  1 and  3,  8.04, 
8.05, Sections  1-9  and  11,  8.06,  Sections  1, 2, 5, 7 and  10, 8.07,  Section  1, and  8.08; 

6.  Article 9.01, Section  1, by  analogy; 

7.  Articles  10.01,  Sections  2, 3 and  5-14,  10.02,  Section  1, (a)-(c),  and  Section  2,  (a) to 
(g)  and  (h),  10.03,  Section  1,  (a),  (b)  and  (d):  however  there  shall  be  at  two  fire 
extinguishers  on board; Articles  10.03,  Sections 2-5  and 10.05; 

8.  Chapter 13; 

9.  Chapter  14 

145 

Chapter 22 

STABILITY  OF VESSELS  CARRYING  CONTAINERS 

Article 22.01 

General 

The  provisions  of  this  chapter  apply  to  vessels  carrying  containers  where  the 
1. 
documents  concerning  stability  are  required  in  pursuance  of  the  police  regulations  in 
force  in the Member States. 

The documents  concerning stability  shall be checked and stamped by an inspection body. 

The documents concerning stability shall provide the operator with  comprehensible 

2. 
information  on vessel stability  each time that containers are loaded. 

The documents  concerning stability shall include at least the following: 

(a) 

tables  of  the  permissible  stability  coefficients,  the  permissible  KG  values  or  the 
permissible heights for the centre of gravity of the cargo; 

(b) 

the data concerning the spaces that can be filled  with ballast water; 

(c) 

the forms  for  checking stability; 

(d) 

an example of a calculation or instmctions for use by the operator. 

In  the  case  of  vessels  likely  to  carry  either  attached  or  non-attached  containers 
3. 
separate  documents  concerning  stability  are  required  for  the  carriage  of  each  type  of 
container. 

A  cargo  of  containers  shall  be  considered  to  be  attached  if  each  individual 
4. 
container  is firmly  attached to the hull of the vessel by means of rails or turnbuckles  and 
its position  cannot alter during the voyage. 

Article 22.02 

Limit  conditions and method of calculation used in confirming the stability  of vessels 
carrying non-attached  containers 

1.  All  methods  of  calculating  vessel  stability  in  the  case  of  non-attached  containers 
shall meet the following  limit conditions: 

(a)  Metacentric height  MG  shall not be less than  1.00 m. 

(b)  Under  the joint  action  of  the  centrifugal  force  resulting  from  the  vessel's  turning, 
wind  thmst  and  the  free  surfaces  occupied  by  the water  the  angle  of  tilt  shall  not 
exceed  5° and the edge of the deck shall not be  immersed. 

146 

(c)  The  lever  effect  resulting  from  the  centrifugal  force  caused  by  the  vessels  turning 

shall be determined  in accordance with the following  formula: 

AKZ

  =  CKZ  •  Zl 

• (KG  -  —)  [m] 

T 

••F 

where: 

CKZ 

=  parameter (0x2=0.04) 

[s2/m]; 

v 

=  the maximum  speed of the vessel  [m/s]; 

KG  =  height of centre of gravity of the laden vessel  above its base [m]; 

T' 

=  average draught of the laden vessel [m]. 

(d)  The  tilting  lever  effect  resulting  from  the  wind  thmst  shall  be  determined  in 

accordance with the following  formula: 

AKW ~  Ckw 

• Ow +  —)  M 

D 

2 

where: 

ckw  =  parameter:  (ckw = 0.025)  [t/m2]; 

A' 

=  side surface  above the water with the vessel laden [m2]; 

D' 

=  displacement of the laden vessel [t]; 

lw 

=  height  of the centre of  gravity  of the side surface  A  above the water  in  relation 
to 

the surface  of the water [m]; 

T 

=  average draught of the laden vessel [m]. 

(e)  The  tilting  lever  effect  resulting  from  the  free  surfaces  exposed  to  rainwater  and 
residual  water  within  the  hold  or  the  double  hold  base  shall  be  determined  in 
accordance with the following  formula: 

HKFO  =  C-~r  . 2 ( b . l . ( b - 0 . 55  4b)) 

[m] 

where: 

cKfo  =  parameter  (cjyo = 0.015)  [t/m2]; 

147 

b 

1 

=  width of hold or (cross)section of the hold in question [m];* 

=  length of hold or (cross)section of hold in question [m];* 

D'  =  displacement of the laden vessel [t]. 

(f)  Half  of the fuel  and fresh  water supply  shall be taken  into  account  for  each load 

situation. 

2. 
The stability of a vessel carrying non-attached  containers shall be considered to be 
sufficient  if the effective  KG does not exceed the Kgzul resulting from  the formula.  The 
Kg^! shall be calculated  for various  displacements  covering  all of the possible  draught 
differences: 

(a)  KGa,  =  KM + ^.(Z.'-f-hKW-hm 

2F 

2 

[m] 

i.  Z + l 
IF 

No value less than  11.5(11.5=  l/tan5°) shall be taken for  —— 

IF 

(b)  KG^  =  KM  - 1.00 [m]. 

The lowest value of  KG^  in accordance with formula  (a) or (b) shall be decisive. 
Within the formula: 

KGzui  ~  maximum  permissible  height  of  the  laden  vessel's  centre  of  gravity 

above its base [m]; 

KM  =  height  of  the  metacentre  above  the  base  [m]  in  accordance  with  the 

approximation formula in section 3; 

F 

=  effective  free board at 1/2L [m]; 

*  The hold  sections providing  free  surfaces  that  are  exposed  to water  arise  from  the  longitudinal  or 

transverse water-tight compartmentalisation that forms independent sections. 

148 

Z  = 

parameter  for  the  centrifugal  force  resulting  from  turning; 

(0,7  •  v)2 

v2 

Z 

= 

=  0,04  • 

[-] 

9,81  •  1,25  •  LF 

LF 

v 

Tm 

=  maximum  speed  of  the  vessel  in  relation  to the water  [m/s]; 

=  average  draught  [m]; 

hKW 

=  tilting  lever  effect  resulting  from  the pressure  of  the  side  wind  (cf. 

section  1, (d))  [m]; 

hKf0 

=  sum  of  the  tilting  lever  effects  resulting  from  the  free  surfaces  occupied 

by  water  (in  accordance  with  section  1, (e))  [m]. 

Approximation  formula  for  .KM 

3. 
Where  no  curve  diagram  is  available  the  value  KM  for  the  calculation  in  accordance 
with  section  2  and  Article  22.03,  section  2,  may  be  determined,  for  example,  via-the 
following  approximation  formulae: 
(a) 

vessels  in the  form  of  a  pontoon 

KM  = 

B2 
r 

Tm 

+ 

T 

m 

2 

[m]; 

( 1 2 . 5- 

)  - Tm 

(b).  other  vessels 

KM  = 

H 

B2

r 

1- 

T 

m 

+ 

[m]. 

Tm 

2 

( 1 2 . 7 - 1 . 2 - —)  •  Tm 

H 

Article  22.03 

Limit  conditions  and  method, of  calculation  for  confirming  the  stability  of  vessels 
car tying  attached  containers 

In  the  case of  attached  containers  all  means  of  calculation  used  in  order  to 

1. 
determine  vessel  stability  shall  meet  the  following  limit  conditions: 

(a)  Metacentric  height  MG  shall  be  not  less  than  0.50  m. 

(b)  No  hull  aperture  shall  be  immersed  by  the  joint  action  of  the  centrifugal  force 
resulting  from  the  turning  of  the  vessel,  the  wind  thrust  and  the  free  surfaces 
occupied  by  water. 

-^/3 

(c)  The  tilting  moments  resulting  from  the  centrifugal  force  due  to  the  vessel's 
turning, the wind thmst  and the free  surfaces  exposed  to water  shall  be  determined 
in accordance with the formulae  referred  to in Article 22.02, section  1, (c)-(e). 

(d)  The count shall be taken  of half of the supply of fuel  and fresh  water  for  each  load 

situation. 

2. 
The  stability  of  a  vessel  carrying  attached  containers  shall  be  considered  to  be 
adequate if the effective  KG  does not  exceed  the KGzul resulting  from  the formula  KGzuj 
that has been calculated  for the different  displacements  resulting from  the possible height 
variations. 

(a)  KG2U| =  KM  -  LJ-  (I -  1.5 £)  + 0.75 %- (Z • £.  -  hKW  -  h^ 
r 

2 V 

2 

r 

0.75  •  ^ - -Z  + l 
F 

(m) 

No value less than 6.6 will be taken for  ——, and 

no value of less than 0 for 

F 

F 

(1 -  1.5 — ). 

F 

I -i 

2 V 

(b)  Kgz u l=  KM-  0.50 (w) 

The lowest value for  KGzul  in accordance with (a) and (b) shall be decisive. 

Within these formulae,  apart from  the terms defined  previously: 

transverse  moment  of  inertia  of  water  line  Tm  [m  ],  (for  the  approximate 
formula  see section 3); 

i 

= 

transverse moment of inertia of the water  line parallel to the base, at height 

Tm+ 

l ^ ' f m4] 

V 

= 

displacement of the vessel  at Tm [m3] 

•Uo 

a  •  BF 

F' 

= 

ideal free board'F' =  H' - Tm  or  F' = 

[m] or the lowest 

value shall be decisive; 

2  •  b 

a 

= 

the  vertical  distance  between  the  lower  edge  of  the  aperture  that  is  first 
immersed  in  the  event  of  tilting  and  the  water  line  in  the  vessel's  normal 
position [m]; 

= 

= 

b 

K 

q 

distance from  that same aperture from  the centre of the vessel [m]; 

ideal payload  H* =  H + 

2 
0.9 • L • BF 

rmi 

sum  of  the  volumes  of  the  deckhouses,  hatchways,  trunk  decks  and  other 
superstructures  up  to  a  height  1.0 m  above  H  or  up  to  the  lowest  aperture  in  the 
space under  consideration,  the lowest value being decisive.  Parts of  spaces  located 
within  a sweep of 0.05 L from  the extremities  of the vessel  shall  not  be taken  into 
account [m3]. 

3.  Approximation formula  for I 

Where  there  is no  curve  diagram  the value  needed  for  calculating  lateral  moment 
of  inertia I  of  the  water  line  may  be  obtained  from  the  following  approximation 
formulas: 

(a)  vessels in the form of a pontoon 

B2

F  •  V 

I  = 

[m*]; 

T, 
m 

(12.5- 

)  -T, 

H 

(b)  other vessels 

B2

F  • V 

I  = 

[m4] . 

m 

( 1 2 . 7 - 1 . 2 - _)  •  Tm 

H 

Article  22.04 

Procedure for  assessing on-board stability 

The procedure for  assessing stability  may be determined  via the documents  referred  to in 
Article 22.01,  section 2. 

151 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  CRAFT LONGER THAN  110 M 

Chapter 22a 

Article 22a.01 

Implementation  of Part I 

In  addition to the requirements  set out in Article 2.03, section 3, concerning  craft  longer 
than  110 m,  apart  from  sea-going  ships,  the  inspection  body  which  is  subsequently  to 
issue the certificate  shall be informed  by the owner or his representative  before  building 
begins.  That inspection body shall conduct inspections  during the building stage.  It may 
opt not to conduct inspections  during the building stage if a certificate  is produced  before 
building  begins  to  show  that  an  approved  classification  society  certifies  that  it  is  to 
supervise that building. 

• 

Article 22a.02 

Implementation  of Part II 

In  addition  to  Part II  Articles 22a. 03-22a.05  shall  apply  to  craft  that  are  longer  than 
110m. 

Article 22a.03 

Durability,  buoyancy and stability 

1. 
In  addition  to  Chapter  15  adequate  strength  of  passenger-vessel  hulls  within  the 
meaning  of Article 3.02,  section  1, (a) shall be proven by means of  a certificate  from  an 
approved  classification  society. 

2. 

Sections 4 -8  shall apply to all other craft  that are longer than  110 m. 

3.  Adequate  hull  strength  within  the  meaning  of  Article 3.02,  section  1,  (a)  and 
adequate  coupled-formation  strength  (longitudinal,  lateral  and  local  strength)  shall  be 
proven  by  means  of  a  certificate  issued  by  an  approved  classification  society  that  takes 
account of the particular method of construction referred  to in section 5. 

The  craft  shall  be  double  hulled  and  be  built with  double  deadwork  and  a  double 

4. 
base in the hold  area: 

(a) 

the  distance  between  the  vertical  edge  of  the  vessel  and  the  sidewall  of  the  hold 
shall be at least 0.60 m; 

(b) 

the double base shall be at least 0.40 m in height. 

152 

5.  Adequate buoyancy  and  stability  in the  event of  damage  shall  be  demonstrated  for 
the least favourable  load situation.  The following  assumption shall be taken into  account 
with regard to the post-damage stage: 

(a) 

(b) 

the internal  hold  bulkheads  and the collision bulkheads  and the bulkheads  between 
the holds and the machine rooms shall be considered to be intact; 

the following  permeability values shall be taken into account: 
Accommodation 
Engine rooms and service premises 
Double bottoms, side chambers, fuel bunkers, ballast tanks, 
and other bunkers according to whether those spaces are, 
according to their intended use, to be assumed to be full  or 
empty, the craft being on its unladen water line 
95%; 

95% 
85% 

0 

or 

(c) 

It will in principle be taken for the proof by calculation that only  one  compartment 
has  been  flooded. 
In  the  double-hull  area  it  will  be  assumed  that  at  least  two 
adjacent  compartments  in longitudinal  terms  have been  flooded.  The  longitudinal 
extent of the damage shall be taken to be equal to 0.1 L; 

(d)  Where  the  engine  room  area  is not  of the  double-hull  construction  as  required  by 

section 5 the craft  shall remain afloat if an engine room is  flooded. 

During the fmal  stage of flooding  referred  to under  (c) or  (d)  a residual  safety  clearance 
of  100 mm shall remain and the list angle of the vessel shall not exceed 5°. 

The proof via calculation  shall be considered to have been provided  if the  positive-result 
calculations referred  to in ADNR footnote  110 295 are provided. 

6.  Where  craft  carry  containers  account  will  also  be  taken  of  the  effects  of  wind 
pressure  and  of  the  free  surfaces  occupied  by  water.  Where  craft  carry  non-attached 
containers  the  side  of  the  deck  shall  not  be  immersed  in  the  final  buoyancy  position 
following  flooding. 

If necessary  in order to comply with section 6 the plane of maximum  draught  shall 

7. 
be redetermined. 

Article 22a.04 

Manoeuvrability 

Vessels  longer  than  110 m  shall  display  adequate  navigability  and  manoeuvrability 
within the meaning of Chapter  5, including in their unladen state. 

Article  22a.05 

Additional  equipment 

Craft  longer than  110m  shall 

(a) 

be  fitted  with  a  bow  thmster  that  is  controlled  from  the  wheelhouse  and  has  a 
minimum  power  of  250 kW,  and  is  also  effective  when  the  craft  is  an  unladen 
state; 

153 

(b)  have a twin-propeller drive system, with two engines, or 

have a single-propeller drive system and a bow thmster in accordance with (a), that 
is efficient  in both transverse and longitudinal directions and has a minimum power 
of500kW; 

(c)  have a permanently-installed bailing system in accordance with Article 8.06; 

(d)  be  fitted  with  a  radar  navigation  system,  together  with  a  turn  indicator  in 

accordance with Article 7.06, section 1. 

Article 22a*06 

(Left void) 

Article 22a.07 

Implementation of Part IV in the event of conversion 

The  inspection  body  may  only  apply  Chapter 24  to  converted  craft  and  craft  that  are 
longer  than  110 m  on  the  basis  of  specific  Commission  recommendations  after  the 
Committee provided for in Article 19 of the Directive has been consulted. 

On the basis of those 'recommendations the inspection body may grant exemptions  from 
Article 22a.03 in pursuance of Article 2.19, section 1. 

154 

PART  m 

Chapter 23 

CREWS 

Article 23.01 

(Left void) 

Article 23.02 

(Left void) 

Article 23.03 

(Left void) 

Article 23.04 

(Left void) 

Article 23.05 

Operating modes 

A distinction is drawn between the following  operating modes: 
AL 
A2 
B 

daytime navigation for  14 hours at the most) 
semi-continuous  navigation for  18 hours at the most 
continuous navigation  for 24 hours at the most 

per 24-hour period 

155 

PART rv 

Chapter 24 

TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL  PROVISIONS 

Article 24.01 

Validity of previous  inspection  certificates 

Without prejudice  to the provisions  of Article 2.09,  section 2, inspection  certificates  that 
have  been  drawn  up  on  the  basis  of  requirements  applying  up  to  30 June  1998  shall 
continue to be valid up to the expiry date entered on the  certificate. 

Article 24.02 

Renewal  of previous  certificates 

1. 
Craft  which,  on  1.7.98 bear  a valid  certificate,  or  are in the  process  of  being  built 
or converted  and which  do not fully  meet the requirements  of the Directive,  as  amended 
by Directive 97/.../EC, 

(a) 

(b) 

shall be made to comply with these within the deadlines and in accordance with the 
transitional requirements  listed in the table below; 

shall,  before  being  made  to  comply,  meet  the  requirements  of  the  version  of  this 
Directive 
from 
Directive 97/.../EEC. 

force  before 

amendments 

that  was 

arising 

the 

in 

2. 

In the table the term 

"NRC"  means that the requirement  does not  apply to vessels  in service unless  the 
parts  concerned  are  replaced  or  converted,  i.e.  that  the  requirement  only 
applies to new  craft,  replaced  parts  and  converted  parts.  If  existing  parts 
are  replaced  by  spare  or  replacement  parts  of  the  same  design  and 
manufacture  this  is  not  a  replacement  "R"  within  the  meaning  of  these 
transitional requirements. 

"Certificate  renewal": 

means that this  requirement  shall be met the next time  that  the  certificate 
is  renewed  after  1.7.98.  If  the  certificate  expires  between  1.7.1998  and 
30.6.1999 that requirement is, however, only mandatory from  1.7.1999. 

156 

Articles and 
sections 

. 

' S U B J E CT 

I 

DEADLINE  OR 
COMMENTS 

3.02  sec. 1  (b) 

3.03 sec. 1 (a) 
Sec. 2 
Sec. 4 

Sec. 5 
2nd paragraph 
3.04 sec. 6 

Chapter  3 
Minimum thickness of the base-, bilge-, and vertical 
side plates in the event of an additional special 
inspection 
Position of the collision bulkhead 
Equipment needed 
Gastight separation  of accommodation from the engine 
and boiler rooms, and from the holds 
Remote monitoring of the doors in the rear-peak 
bulkhead 
Engine room exits 

) 

"  NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

NRC 

The engine rooms, which 
in pursuance  of the 
version of Chapter  1  in 
force before  1.7.98 are not 
to be considered to be 
engine rooms, shall not be 
required to have a second 
exit 

*) 

For a transitional period of  10 years the inspection body  may  accept the 
following  values  for  the  minimum  thickness  of  the  base,  bilge  and  vertical 
sideplates  referred  to  in  Article 3.02,  section  1,  (b)  for  double-bottom  and 
double-deadwork  craft whose keel was laid before  1  July  1998. 

L in [m] 

,  Minimum  thickness,  in  [mm]  of  the 

base, bilge and vertical-side  plates 

20 
30 
40 
50 
60 
70 
80 
90 
100 
110 

' 

j 

3.0 
33 
3_9 
43 
4/7 
5.1 
5J 
5/7 
6.1 
6A 

The values shall apply to a floor-plate  gap of <_ 500 mm.  If the gap is wider the minimal 
thickness shall be multiplied by the following  factor: 

gap [mm] 
500 

If  the  craft  is  of  an  intermediate  length  the  minimum  thickness  values  shall  be 
interpolated  linearly.  The minimum  thickness  deriving from  draught  shall  be  checked  in 
formula  2. 
accordance 

Article 3.02, 

Section 

with 

(b), 

1, 

157 

Articles and 
sections 

I 

SUBJECT 

1  DEADLINE OR 

COMMENT 

Chapter 4 
(no transitional requirements) 
Chapter 5 
Minimum speed 

Chapter 6 
Manoeuvrability required by Section 5 
List and ambient temperature 
Rudder-spindle bushings 

, 

: 

' 

New  builds 
1.7.1999 

from 

NRC 
NRC 
New  builds 
1.7.1999 

from 

Placing in service  of the second  control  system by  a  single  NRC 
operation 
Manoeuvrability  required  by  Chapter  5  via  the  second  NRC 
control system or manufacturer control 
NRC 
Connection of other users to the hydraulic-control systems 
NRC 
Separate hydraulic reservoirs 
NRC 
Automatic disengagement of the hand wheel 
NRC 
Two independent control systems 
Adequate  manoeuvrability  in the  event  of  failure  of  one  of  NRC 
the steering-propeller, waterjet,  cycloidal-propulsion or bow-
thruster system 
Level  alarm  for  the  two  hydraulic-system  hydraulic  and  NRC 
pressure reservoirs 
Checking of the buffer devices 
Requirements  concerning 
accordance with Article 9.20 
Turn indicators used in the rate-of-tum regulators 
Chapter 7 
Field of view at the helmsman's normal position 

NRC 
in  NRC 

the  electronic 

systems 

NRC 

NRC 

~ 

~ 

, 
5.06  Sec  1 
1st sentence 

6.01 Sec. 1 
Sec 3 
Sec 7 

6.02 Sec. 2 

Sec 3 

6.03 Sec  1 
Sec 2 
6.05 Sec  1 
6.06 Sec  1 
Sec 2 

6.07 Sec 2a) 

Sec 2e) 

6.08 Sec  1 

Sec 5 

7.02 Sec 3 
Second para. 
Sec 5 
7.03 Sec  1 

Tinted glazing 
Controls 

Sec. 2 

Monitoring instruments 

Sec 3 

Warning-light test 

Sec  4 
Sec  7 

Green warning light 
Alarm-system shut down 

of 

of 

for 

NRC 
Renewal 
the 
certificate  where  the 
wheelhouse  has  not 
been 
already 
designed 
one 
person 
the 
Renewal 
certificate  where  the 
wheelhouse  has  not 
been 
already 
one 
designed 
person 
the 
Renewal 
certificate 
• 
Certificate  renewal 
NRC  where 
wheel 
already 
designed 
person 

the 
not 
been 
one 

has 

for 

for 

of 

158 

7.03 Sec 8 
7.04 Sec  1 
Sec 2 

Automatic connection to another energy source 
Control of the power plants and steering system 
Control of each power plant 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC,  provided  that 
the  wheel  house  has 
already  been 
not 
designed 
one 
for 
person 
NRC 
Certificate  renewal 

7.05 Sec 2 
7.06 Sec  1 
Third sentence 
7.07 Sec 2 
7.09 
7.12 

8.01 Sec 3 

8.02 Sec  1 
8.03 Sec 2 
Sec 4 
8.05 Sec  1 
Sec 2 
Sec 3 
Sec 4 

Sec 6 
Sec  7 
Sec 9 

Monitoring of signal lights 
Rate of turn indicator located in front of the helmsman 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

Radio telephone system 
Alarm system 
Height-adjustable wheel houses 
Chapter 8 
Only  internal  combustion  engines  burning  fuels  having  a  NRC 
flash point higher than 55°C 
NRC 
Preventing inadvertent starting of the engines 
NRC 
Systems for checking the critical levels 
NRC 
Drive shaft bushes 
NRC 
Steel fuel tanks 
__^  NRC 
Automatic closure of water-extraction valves 
No fuel tank ahead of the collision bulkhead 
NRC 
No daily-supply tanks and fittings  above  engines or exhaust  NRC 
pipes 
Installation and sizing of breather pipes and connecting pipes  NRC 
Shut-off device that can be operated from the deck 
NRC 
Fuel-tank  capacity-gauging  device  legible  right  up  to  NRC 

First sentence  maximum filling level 

Sec  11 

8.06 Sec 2 
First sentence 
Second 

sentence 

Monitoring of filling level, not only for the power plants but  NRC 
also for the other engines needed for navigation purposes 
Ban on installing bilge pumps within the same space 

NRC 

Vessels  not  intended  for  the  carriage  of  goods  with  a  NRC 
displacement  higher than  250 m3 and  an  engine power  less 
than 225 kW 

Third sentence  Each pump capable of use on each sealed compartment 

NRC 

Sec  8 

A  simple  shut-off  device  is  not  an  adequate  form  of  link 
between  the ballast  compartments  and  the  draining  system 
where holds have been designed for ballast 

159 

|  NRC 

the 

Where  so  required 
by 
national 
regulations 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

8.06 Sec 9 

Sec. 10 

Depth gauges for hold bottoms 
Attachment of seals for closures 

Oily-water and drained-oil stores 
Limit of 65 dB(A) not to be exceeded by moored vessels 
Chapter 9 
Submission of the document to the inspection body 

the  main  control  panel,  the  ~NRC 

Switching  diagrams  for 
emergency-installation panel and the distribution panels 
NRC 
Ambient inside temperatures and temperatures on deck 
NRC 
Electricity supply system 
NRC 
Explosion proofing 
NRC 
Cross-section of the earthing conductors 
Ventilation  when  accumulators  are  installed  in  a  closed  NRC 
compartment, cabinet or chest 
Direct  supply  of  appliances  required  for  propelling  and  NRC 
manoeuvring the vessel 
NRC 
Earth-insulation checking devices 
Emergency circuit breakers 
NRC 
Ban  on  single-pole  switches  in  laundries,  bathrooms  and  NRC 
washrooms 

Minimum unit cross-section of 1.5 mm  for conductors 
Cables linking mobile wheel houses 
Distribution of lighting appliances among two circuits 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

sentence 

" 

8.07 
8.08 Sec. 3 

9.01 Sec. 1 
Second 

sentence 
Sec 2 

Second para. 

Sec. 3 

9.02 
9.04 
9.05 Sec 4 
9.11 Sec 4 

9.12 Sec 2d 

Sec 3b 

9.13 
9.14 Sec 3 
Second 

9.15 Sec. 2 
Sec. 9 
9.16 Sec. 3 
Second 

sentence 

9.19 
9.20 
9.21 

Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment 
Electronic equipment 
Electromagnetic compatibility 
Chapter 10 
Anchors, chains and anchor hawsers 

10.01 
10.02 Sec. 2a  Mooring cables 
Towing cables 

Sec  2b 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

^ _ __ 

160 

10.03  Sec  2c  I 

"

p) 

and Sec 5  Extinguishing substances and fire-fighting equipment 

11.02 Sec 4 

11.04 
11.05 
11.06 
11.07 
11.08 
11.09 
11.10 
11.11 
11.12 

12.01 Sec. 1 
12.02 Sec  2 
Sec 3 
Sec 4 
Sec 6 

Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z ZZ 

Chapter 11 
Equipment  on  outer  edges  of  decks,  gunwales  and  work  NRC 
stations 
Gunwale 
Access to working spaces 
Exits and emergency exits 
Ladders, steps and similar devices 
Inside spaces 
Protection against noise and vibration 
Hatch covers 
Winches 
Cranes 
Chapter 12 
Accommodation for persons normally living on board 
Accessibility of accommodation 
Floor situation 
Living and sleeping quarters 
Headroom within accommodation 

**) 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

1. 
continue to be accepted provided that these meet the national requirements in force. 

The permanently installed C02 extinguishing systems fitted before  1  January 1985 shall 

2. 
1998 shall continue to be permitted. 

Permanently  installed  halon  1301 (CBrF3)  extinguishing  systems fitted  before  1 July 

3. 
vessels whose keel was laid down after  1 January 1999. 

Article  10.03,  Section  5(b)  shall  only  apply  if  those  installations  were  laid  out  in 

The requirement applies to vessels built on their keels after  1.1.1996 and for vessels in service 
under the following conditions: 

The requirements of Article 11.04 should be met where the entire whole area has been renewed. 

Where the entire length of the gunwale has been converted, thus altering the side clearance, 

Article  11.04 shall be complied with where the side clearance of the gunwale up to a 

(a) 
height of 0.90 m that was available before the conversion, has to be reduced, 

(b) 
the  side clearance  of the gunwale up to height  of 0.90 m or the  side  clearance  above 
this that were available for the conversion do not have to be reduced if their dimensions are less 
than those required by Article 11.04. 

161 

Articles and 
sections 
12.02 Sec 7 

I 

SUBJECT 

accommodation 

Living 
accommodation 
Ground area of the living accommodation 
Volume of each room 

separate 

Sec. 8 
Sec. 9 
Sec. 10  Volume of air per person 
Sec. 11  Dimensions of doors 
Sec  12  Arrangement of staircases 
Sec  13 

12.03 
12.04 
12.05 
12.06 
12.07 

14.09 Sec. 4 

Pipework for dangerous gases and liquids 
Sanitary installations 
Galleys 
Potable water 
Heating and ventilation 
Other accommodation installations 
Chapter  13 
(no transitional requirements) 
Chapter 14 
Inspection connection 

Chapter 15 
(no transitional requirements) 

I  DEADLINE OR 

COMMENT 

from 

sleeping  NRC 

NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 
NRC 

Renewal 
certificate 
to in Article 14.15 

of 
the 
referred 

162 

NRC 

~ 

16.01 Sec  3 
Final sentence 

Chapter  16 
Requirements  concerning  controls 

Chapter  17 
(no transitional requirements) 

"Chapter  18 

(no transitional requirements) 
_ _ _ _ __ 
(no transitional requirements) 

_ _ _ __ 

(no transitional requirements) 

_ _ _ _ _ __ 

(no transitional requirements) 

Chapter  22 
(no transitional requirements) 
Chapter  23 
(no transitional requirements) 

~~ 

~ 

163 

ANNEX  III 

MODEL COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION  CERTIFICATE 

(Article 3 of the Directive) 

COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION 
CERTIFICATE 

(Reserved for State emblem) 

NAME OF STATE  /  SEAL OF STATE 

CERTIFICATE No 

Place, date 

Seal 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

Remarks: 

The craft may be used for navigation by virtue of this certificate only while in the condition herein described. 

In the event of major alterations or repairs, the craft must undergo a special inspection before any new voyage. 

The  owner of the  craft,  or his representative,  must  inform  an  Inspection  Body  of  any  change  in  the  name  or 
ownership of the craft,  any remeasurement  and any  change in the official  number, registration number or home 
port, and send it the inspection certificate for amendment. 

164 

Certificate N° 

of the. 

Inspection Body 

1.  Name of craft 

2. Type of craft 

3. Official number 

4.  Name and domicile of owner 

5. 

Place of registration and registration number 

6. Home port 

7.  Year of construction 

8. Name and location of shipyard 

9_ 

This certificate replaces Certificate No ....... 

issued on 

by the 

Inspection Body 

10.  The abovementioned craft, 

subsequent to the inspection carried out on *) 

on presentation of the certificate issued on *) 

by the recognised classification  society 

is acknowledged as fit to operate 
-  on Community waterways in zone(s) (*). 

on the waterways in zone(s) (*). 
(Names of States(*)) 

in 

except for:. 

-on the following waterways in:...(Name of the State 
<*)) 

at the maximum authorised draught and with the rigging specified below. 

11.  The validity of this certificate expires on. 

*)  Amendment to item(s): 

New text: 

*\ 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Seal 

')  Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

165 

Certificate No 

of the 

.Inspection Body 

12.  The certificate number (1 ), official number (2), registration number (3) and measurement number (4) are affixed with 

the corresponding signs at the following locations on the craft 

13.  The maximum authorised draught is indicated on each side of the craft 

-  by two - 

- draught marks*). 

-  by the upper measurement plates*). 

Two draught scales have been applied  ). 

The rear measurement scales serve as draught scales: they have been supplemented for that purpose by figures 
indicating the draughts*). 

14.  Without prejudice to the restrictions*)  mentioned in items 15 and 52, the craft is fit to 

1.  push-tow*) 
1.1  in rigid formation*) 
1.2  with guided articulation*) 
2.  be push-towed*) 
2.1  in risid formation*) 
2.2  at the head of a rigid formation* ) 
2.3  with guided articulation*) 
3.  power a breasted-up  formation*) 

4.  be empowered in a breasted-up  formation*) 
5.  tow*) 
5.1 craft having no motive power of tb :ir own*) 
5.2 motorised craft*) 
5.3 upstream only*) 
6.  be towed*) 
6.1 as a motorised craft  ) 
6.2 as a craft with no motive power of its own*) 

*)  Amendment to item(s): 

New text: 

* ) 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Seal 

") Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

166 

Certificate No 

of the 

.Inspection Body 

15.  Authorised  formations 

1.  The craft  is authorised to propel the following  formations: 
For 
mation 
figure 

Restrictions resulting  from  chapters 5 and 16 

Max.  dimensions 
m 

Navigation direction and load  status 
UPSTREAM 

I  DOWNSTREAM 
empty 

loaded  t 

Maximum wetted 
section in m2 
upstream  downstream 

Remarks 

No 

length 

breadth 

loaded t 

empty 

_3 

m 

,  o. Stb. 

s 

1*1 
! 

s 

4 

j 

m 

_j 

1 

|  1 

10 

14 

Weitere Formationen: 

!^S 

15 

12 

r>^ï 

16 

13 

17 

Zeichenerklârung: 

K 
SB 
o. stb = without  starboard 
Weitere Formationen  = Other  formations 
Key to  symbols: SB, MS, SL = pusher craft,  self-propelled  barge, pushed  Ughter 

MS 

SL 

2.  Couplings: 

Type of coupling: 
Number  of coupling  cables: 
Breaking  strain per longitudinal  coupling: 
Breaking  strain per coupling  cable: 
Number of cable windings: 

Number of couplings per side: 
Length of each coupling  cable: 
kN 

kN 

*) 

Amendment  to item(s): 

New text: 

*\ 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Seal 

'*)  Delete as  appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

167 

Certificate  No 

of the 

Inspection  Body 

16.  Measurement certificate No 

ofthe 

Measurement  Office  dated. 

17_  Max. length. 
17b- 

Length L 

m 
m 

18a.  Max. breadth 
18b. Breadth B 

m 
m 

19. Maximum draught  m  20. Freeboard 

cm 

21 •  Dead weight/Displacement* ) 

22. Number of passengers: 

23. Number of passenger berths: 

24.  Number of watertight compartments 25. Number of holds 

26. Type of hatch cover 

t/m3*) 

27.  Number of main propulsion engines  28. Total power rating of main means o 

29. Number of main propellers 

30.  Number of bow 
windlasses 

propulsion 

of which 

powered 

kW 
31. Number of stem 
jwindlasses 

of which 

powered 

32.  Number of towing hooks 

33. Number of towing winches 

of which 

powered 

34. 

Steering gear 
Number of rudder blades 
on main rudder 

Main rudder drive 

manual *) 
electric  ) 

electric/hydraulic  ) 
hydraulic*) 

Other installations: yes/no*)  Type : 

Flanking rudder: 
yes/no*) 

Flanking rudder drive: 

Bow rudder installation 

yes/no*) 

.  bow rudder*) 
bow thruster*) 
other installation*) 

manual*) 
electric  ) 

electric/hydraulic*) 
hydraulic*) 

Remote control 
yes/no*) 

Remote activation 
yes/no*) 

3 5. 

Pumping equipment 
Total calculated 
capacity 

Number of power-
driven pumps 

Flow rate 

Number of hand 
pumps 

') 

*\ 

1/min 

Amendment to item(s): 
New text: 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Seal 

*)  Delete as appropriate 

1/min 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

168 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

36.  Number and position of closures.referred to in Article 8.06, Section 10 

37.  Anchors 

Number of bow anchors  Total mass of bow anchors  Number of stem anchors 

Total mass of stern anchors 

kg 

k2 

38.  Anchor chains 

Number of bow anchor 
chains 

Number of stern anchor 
chains 

39.  Mooring cables 

Length of each chain 

Breaking strain of each chain 

m 

kN 

Length of each chain 

Breaking strain of each chain 

m 

1st  cable 

m long with a breaking strain of 

2nd cable 

m long with a breaking strain  of. 

3rd cable 

m long with a breaking strain of. 

40.  Towing cables 

with a length of 

m and a breaking strain of 

with a length of 

m and a breaking strain of. 

kN 

kN 

kN 

kN 

kN 

kN 

41.  Visual and audible signals 

The Hghts, flags, balls, floats and audible warning devices used for signalling and to emit the visual and audible 
signals prescribed by the police regulations in force in the Member States are carried on board, as are the stand-alone 
emergency mooring lights prescribed by the police regulations in force in the Member States. 

")  Amendment to item(s): 

Newtext: 

*) 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Se_l 

*)  Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

169 

Certificate No. 

of the.. 

Inspection Body 

42. 

Other rigging 
heaving line 
gangway with handrail 
gaff hook 
bandaging kit 
pair of binoculars 
notice concerning rescue 
of men overboard 
fire-resistant receptacles 
embarkation stairway /ladder ) 

Voice communie-  -  alternative two-way*) 
ation system 

-  simultaneous two-way/tèlephone*) 
-  internal radio-telephone link*) 

Radio-telephone 
installation 

-  vessel-to-vessel service 
-  nautical information service 
-  vessel-port authority service 

Cranes 

-  in accordance with Article 11.12 Section 9*) 
-  other cranes with a useful load not exceeding 2000 

kg*) 

. 

43. 

Fire-fighting 
appliances 

Number of portable 
extinguishers 

Fixed sprinkler system(s) 
Other fixed fire-fighting  system(s) 

No  Number*) 
No  Number*). 

Number of fire pumps 

Number of hydrants 

Number of hoses 

The powered drainage pump replaces a fire pump 

Yes/No*) 

44. 

Survival equipment 
Number of lifebuoys 

A life-jacket for each person regularly on board. 
Other survival equipment* on passenger vessels*) 

A dinghy with a set of oars, one mooring line and a baler*) 

Collective survival equipment on passenger vessels*) 

45. 

Special wheelhouse arrangements for steering on radar by one person: 

Approved for steering on radar by one person*). 

*)  Amendment to item(s): 

New text: 

*) 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Seal 

*)  Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

170 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

46 

The craft is authorised to operate under mode Al*), A2*), B*). 

Vessel equipment and crew 

47. 

(Indicate whether the vessel meets the requirements of national and mtemational law, if any.) 

Operating mode 

Al 

A2 

B 

« 

48. 

Miriimum crew. 
(Indicate whether the vessel meets the requirements of national and international law, if any.) 

Operating mode 

Al 

A2 

B 

Observations and special conditions: 

*) 
/ 

*) 

Amendment to item(s): 

This page has been replaced. 

Seal 

*)  Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

171 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

49-  Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*) 
The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on 
A certificate dated 

from the 

Supplementary/special*) inspection  certificate 

*). 

recognised classification society 

was presented to the Inspection Body*). 

Reason for the inspection/certificate*); 

In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity for the certificate is maintained/extended*) 
until 

(Place) 

(date) 

Seal 

, 

) Delete as  appropriate 

Inspection  Body 

(Signature) 

49. 

Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*) 

Supplementary/special*) inspection  certificate 

The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on 
A certificate dated 

from the 

*). 

recognised classification society 

was presented to the Inspection Body  ). 

Reason for the inspection/certificate  ): 

In view of the inspection result/certificate  ), the period of validity for the certificate is maintained/extended*) 

until 

(Place) 

Seal 

) Delete as appropriate 

(date) 

Inspection  Body 

(Signature) 

49.  Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*) 

Supplementary/special*) inspection  certificate 

The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on 
A certificate dated 

from 

). 

the 

recognised classification society 

was presented to the Inspection Body  ). 

Reason for the inspection/certificate*): 

In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity for the certificate is maintained/extended*) 

until 

(Place) 

-Seal 

) Delete as appropriate 

(date) 

Inspection  Body 

(Signature) 

172  ^9  3 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

49-  Extension/confirmation*) of certificate  validity*) 

Supplementary/special*) inspection  certificate 

The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on 
A  certificate  dated 

from 

*). 

the 

recognised classification  society 

was presented to the Inspection Body*). 

Reason for the inspection/certificate  ): 

In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity  for the certificate  is  maintained/extended*) 

until 

(Place) 

Seal 

) Delete as appropriate 

(date) 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

49. 

Extension/confirmation*)  of certificate  validity*) 

Supplementary/special*)  inspection  certificate 

The Inspection Body  inspected the vessel on 
A  certificate  dated 

from 

*). 

the 

recognised  classification  society 

was presented to the Inspection Body  ). 

Reason for the inspection/certificate  ); 

In view of the inspection result/certificate  ), the period of validity for the certificate  is maintained/extended*) 

until 

(Place) 

Seal 

) Delete as appropriate 

(date) 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

49. 

Extension/confirmation*)  of certificate  validity*) 

Supplementary/special*)  inspection  certificate 

The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on 
A  certificate  dated 

from 

*). 

the 

recognised  classification  society 

was presented to the Inspection Body  ). 

Reason for the inspection/certificate  ): 

In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity  for the certificate  is mamtained/extended  ) 

until 

(Place) 

Seal 

) Delete as appropriate 

(date) 

Inspection  Body 

(Signature) 

X 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

50.  Attestation relating to liquefied  gas plant 

The liquefied gas plant on board the craft has been inspected by the authorised officer*) 

The plant includes the following gas-consuming appliances: 

Plant 

Serial No 

Model 

Make 

Type 

-

Position 

This  attestation  is 

valid until 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Authorised officer  ) 

*1 

Amendment  tn  itei 

„(s): 

This page has been replaced. 

*) 

Seal 

*)  Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

174 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

51. 

Extension of the attestation relating to liquefied gas plant 
The period covered by the attestation relating to hquefied gas plants) 

dated 

: 

is extended until 

-  following the supplementary inspection by the authorised officer 

-  on presentation of the acceptance report dated 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Seal 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

51.  Extension of the attestation relating to hquefied gas plant 

The period covered by the attestation relating to hquefied gas plant(s) 

dated 

; 

is extended until 

-  following the supplementary inspection by the authorised officer 

-  on presentation of the acceptance report dated 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Seal 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

51.  Extension of the attestation relating to liquefied gas plant 

The period covered by the attestation relating to hquefied gas plant(s) 

dated 

is extended until 

-  following the supplementary inspection by the authorised officer 

-  on presentation of the acceptance report dated 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Seal 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

175 

Certificate No 

of the 

Inspection Body 

52.  Annex to certificate No 

*)  Amendment to item(s): 

Newtext: 

*\ 

This page has been replaced. 
Place, date 

Seal 

')  Delete as appropriate 

Inspection Body 

(Signature) 

Continued on page*) 
End of inspection  certificate*) 

176 

ANNEX  Va 

Any  additional  technical  requirements  for  vessels  operating  on  waterways  of  Zone  1  and/or 
Zone 2,  adopted by Member  States pursuant to Article  ,5 paragraph  1 of  the present  Directive, 
shall be restricted to the following  subjects  : 

Zone 2 

the watertightness and strength of fasteners  to close windows, doors, portholes, hatches, etc. ; 
the anchor equipment including the length of the anchor chains; 

-  minimum  freeboard; 
-  safety distance; 
- 
- 
-  signalling lights and horns; 
-  compass; 
-  radio transmission/receiver installation (VHF); 
- 
-  availability of nautical charts. 

life raft  and other lifesaving  equipment; 

Zone 1 

In addition to the requirements for Zone 2, the competent authorities may require : 
-  an increased freeboard  and safety distance; 
-  evidence,  if appropriate  through  a special attestation from  a recognised  classification  society, 
that the vessel is sufficiently  strong and stable to cope with the prevailing wave conditions. 

177 

ANNEX  Vb 

Any reduced technical requirements for vessels operating on Zone 4 waterways only,  adopted by 
Member  States pursuant to Article 5, paragraph  3 of the present Directive,  shall be restricted  to 
the following  subjects  : 

Zone 4 

-  minimum  freeboard; 
-  safety distance; 
-  anchor equipment,  including length of anchor chains; 
-  minimum  speed; 
- 

life saving equipment and life  raft. 

Simplified  construction  requirements  may  be  allowed  for  vessels  used  exclusively  for  the 
carriage of freight  or passengers in a strictly limited area. 

178 

ANNEX VI 

MODEL TEMPORARY COMMUNITY 
INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE 

(Article 11  of the Directive) 

179 

Temporary Community certificate*)  /  Temporary certificate of approval *) 

1.  Name of craft 

N° 

2. Type of craft 

3. Official number 

4. 

Name and domicile of owner 

5- 

Length 17 LWL*) 

Number of passengers. 

Number of berths*) 

Crew:  (Indicate whether vessel meets the requirements of national and mternational law, if any.) 

6-1  The craft is authorised to operate under mode Al  ), A2*), B*). 

6.2  Vessel equipment and crew. 

(Indicate whether vessel meets the requirements of national and international law, if any.) 

Mode of operation 

Al 

A2 

B 

6.3.  Minimum crew:  (Indicate whether vessel meets the requirements of national and international law, if any.). 

Liquefied gas plant(s) 
Attestation valid until 

8. 

Special conditions 

9- 

Carriage of dangerous goods, see overleaf*) 

10.  Validity 

Temporary certificate*) / temporary certificate of approval*) valid until, 
for navigation*) / for a single voyage ) 
is acknowledged as fit to operate 
-  on Community waterways in zone(s) (*) 

(Date) 

on the waterways in zone(s) (*) 

.in 

(Names of States(*)) 

except for: 
-on the following waterways in -....(Name of 
State(*)) 

11. 

Place 

Date 

Place 

Date 

Competent authority for temporary certificate of approval 

Survey Body 

Seal 

*) Delete as appropriate 

Signature 

Seal 

Signature 

180 

9.  Carriage of dangerous goods 

(Indicate whether the vessel meets the requirements of national and mtemational law, if any.) 

181 

ISSN 0254-1475 

COM(97) 644  final 

DOCUMENTS 

EN 

02  03  07 

Catalogue  number  :  CB-CO-97-661-EN-C 

ISBN  92-78-28368-1 

Office  for  Official  Publications of the European  Communities 

L-2985  Luxembourg 

1gz